|
Toshiba Personal Computer
PORTEGE M300
Maintenance Manual
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
File Number 960-504
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
This maintenance manual describes how to perform hardware service maintenance for the
Toshiba Personal Computer PORTEGE M300.
The procedures described in this manual are intended to help service technicians isolate
faulty Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and replace them in the field.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Four types of messages are used in this manual to bring important information to your
attention. Each of these messages will be italicized and identified as shown below.
DANGER:“Danger” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in death or
serious bodily injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
WARNING: “Warning” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in bodily
injury, if the safety instruction is not observed.
CAUTION: “Caution” indicates the existence of a hazard that could result in property
damage, if the safety instruction is not observed.
NOTE: “Note” contains general information that relates to your safe maintenance
service.
Improper repair of the computer may result in safety hazards. Toshiba requires service
technicians and authorized dealers or service providers to ensure the following safety
precautions are adhered to strictly.
‰ Be sure to fasten screws securely with the right screwdriver. If a screw is not fully
fastened, it could come loose, creating a danger of a short circuit, which could cause
overheating, smoke or fire.
‰ If you replace the battery pack or RTC battery, be sure to use only the same model
battery or an equivalent battery recommended by Toshiba. Installation of the wrong
battery can cause the battery to explode.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manual is divided into the following parts:
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Hardware Overview describes the PORTEGE M300 system unit and
each FRU.
Troubleshooting Procedures explains how to diagnose and resolve
FRU problems.
Test and Diagnostics describes how to perform test and diagnostic
operations for maintenance service.
Replacement Procedures describes the removal and replacement of the
FRUs.
Appendices The appendices describe the following:
‰ Handling the LCD module
‰ Board layout
‰ Pin assignments
‰ Display codes
‰ Key layout
‰ Wiring diagrams
‰ BIOS Rewrite Procedures
‰ EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures
‰ Reliability
iv
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conventions
This manual uses the following formats to describe, identify, and highlight terms and
operating procedures.
Acronyms
On the first appearance and whenever necessary for clarification acronyms are enclosed in
parentheses following their definition. For example:
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Keys
Keys are used in the text to describe many operations. The key top symbol as it appears on
the keyboard is printed in boldface type.
Key operation
Some operations require you to simultaneously use two or more keys. We identify such
operations by the key top symbols separated by a plus (+) sign. For example, Ctrl + Pause
(Break) means you must hold down Ctrl and at the same time press Pause (Break). If
three keys are used, hold down the first two and at the same time press the third.
User input
Text that you are instructed to type in is shown in the boldface type below:
DISKCOPY A: B:
The display
Text generated by the computer that appears on its display is presented in the type face
below:
Format complete
System transferred
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Hardware Overview
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
Features...................................................................................................................... 1-1
System Unit Block Diagram...................................................................................... 1-7
USB Floppy Disk Drive........................................................................................... 1-11
Hard Disk Drive....................................................................................................... 1-12
Optical Drive............................................................................................................ 1-16
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 1-21
TFT Color Display................................................................................................... 1-22
Power Supply........................................................................................................... 1-24
Batteries ................................................................................................................... 1-27
1.10 AC Adapter.............................................................................................................. 1-30
Chapter 2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
Troubleshooting......................................................................................................... 2-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart........................................................................................ 2-3
Power Supply Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 2-7
System Board Troubleshooting ............................................................................... 2-18
USB FDD Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 2-31
HDD Troubleshooting ............................................................................................. 2-34
Keyboard Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 2-39
Touch pad Troubleshooting..................................................................................... 2-41
Display Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-42
2.10 Optical drive Troubleshooting................................................................................. 2-45
2.11 Modem Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-46
2.12 LAN Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-48
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting............................................................................... 2-49
2.14 Bluetooth Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 2-52
2.15 Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................ 2-55
vi
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
The Diagnostic Test................................................................................................... 3-1
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4
Setting of the hardware configuration ....................................................................... 3-8
Heatrun Test............................................................................................................. 3-11
Subtest Names.......................................................................................................... 3-12
System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-14
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-16
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-17
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-18
3.10 Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-21
3.11 Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-23
3.12 Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-25
3.13 Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-26
3.14 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-29
3.15 NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.16 Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-32
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-34
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names......................................................................... 3-35
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status ................................................................................... 3-38
3.20 Only One Test.......................................................................................................... 3-40
3.21 Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-48
3.22 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-49
3.23 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-51
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-52
3.25 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-57
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b)............................................................ 3-59
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)......................................................... 3-61
3.28 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)...................................................... 3-65
3.29 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)............................................................ 3-70
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program .................................................. 3-74
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.31 Sound Test Program................................................................................................. 3-88
3.32 SETUP ..................................................................................................................... 3-94
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
General....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Battery Pack............................................................................................................... 4-8
PC Card /SD card /CF card...................................................................................... 4-10
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-14
Memory module....................................................................................................... 4-17
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-19
Switch membrane..................................................................................................... 4-22
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................. 4-24
Optical drive ............................................................................................................ 4-25
4.10 Display assembly ..................................................................................................... 4-28
4.11 Speaker..................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.12 Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-36
4.13 Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-38
4.14 RTC battery.............................................................................................................. 4-39
4.15 LAN jack.................................................................................................................. 4-40
4.16 System board............................................................................................................ 4-41
4.17 Microphone.............................................................................................................. 4-43
4.18 Fan............................................................................................................................ 4-44
4.19 Cooling fin ............................................................................................................... 4-45
4.20 HDD FPC................................................................................................................. 4-47
4.21 Modem..................................................................................................................... 4-48
4.22 DC-IN jack............................................................................................................... 4-50
4.23 PC card slot cover.................................................................................................... 4-51
4.24 Display latch ............................................................................................................ 4-53
4.25 Battery lock/Battery latch........................................................................................ 4-55
4.26 LCD mask ................................................................................................................ 4-56
4.27 LCD unit/FL inverter............................................................................................... 4-58
4.28 PC card slot cover.................................................................................................... 4-63
viii
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Wireless LAN antennas/Front panel........................................................................ 4-65
4.30 Hinge........................................................................................................................ 4-67
4.31 Fluorescent lamp...................................................................................................... 4-68
Appendices
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module ........................................................................... A-1
Appendix B Board Layout ................................................................................................ B-1
Appendix C Pin Assignments............................................................................................ C-1
Appendix D Display Codes............................................................................................... D-1
Appendix E Key Layout.....................................................................................................E-1
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................F-1
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures............................................................................. G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures........................................................................ H-1
Appendix I Reliability........................................................................................................I-1
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Hardware Overview
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1-ii
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
Chapter 1
Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
Features.......................................................................................................................1-1
System Unit Block Diagram.......................................................................................1-7
USB Floppy Disk Drive ...........................................................................................1-11
Hard Disk Drive .......................................................................................................1-12
Optical Drive ............................................................................................................1-16
1.5.1
1.5.2
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive..........................................................1-16
DVD Super Multi drive ......................................................................1-18
1.6
1.7
Keyboard ..................................................................................................................1-21
TFT Color Display ...................................................................................................1-22
1.7.1
1.7.2
LCD Module .......................................................................................1-22
FL Inverter Board ...............................................................................1-23
1.8
1.9
Power Supply............................................................................................................1-24
Batteries....................................................................................................................1-27
1.9.1
1.9.2
1.9.3
Main Battery .......................................................................................1-27
Battery Charging Control....................................................................1-28
RTC battery.........................................................................................1-29
1.10 AC Adapter...............................................................................................................1-30
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
Figures
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Figure 1-7
Figure 1-8
Figure 1-9
Front of the computer..................................................................................... 1-5
System unit configuration.............................................................................. 1-6
System unit block diagram............................................................................. 1-7
USB FDD..................................................................................................... 1-11
HDD............................................................................................................. 1-12
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive................................................................... 1-16
DVD Super Multi drive ............................................................................... 1-18
Keyboard...................................................................................................... 1-21
LCD module................................................................................................. 1-22
Tables
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 1-3
Table 1-4
Table 1-5
Table 1-6
Table 1-7
Table 1-8
Table 1-9
Table 1-10
Table 1-11
Table 1-12
Table 1-13
Table 1-14
Table 1-15
USB FDD specifications.............................................................................. 1-11
HDD dimensions.......................................................................................... 1-13
HDD specifications...................................................................................... 1-14
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive outline dimensions.................................... 1-16
DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications............................................ 1-17
DVD Super Multi drive outline dimensions................................................ 1-18
DVD Super Multi drive specifications ........................................................ 1-19
LCD module specifications.......................................................................... 1-22
FL inverter board specifications .................................................................. 1-23
Power supply output rating.......................................................................... 1-25
Battery specifications................................................................................... 1-27
Time required for main battery.................................................................... 1-28
Data preservation time................................................................................. 1-28
RTC battery charging time .......................................................................... 1-29
AC adapter specifications ............................................................................ 1-30
1-iv
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
1
Features
1.1 Features
The Toshiba PORTEGE M300 Personal Computer uses extensive Large Scale Integration
(LSI), and Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) technology extensively to
provide compact size, low power usage and high reliability. This computer incorporates the
following features and benefits.
‰ Microprocessor
The PORTEGE M300 computer is equipped with an Intel Pentium-M/Celeron-M
Processor, which operate at 400MHz FSB.
•
•
Intel Pentium-M ULV Processor 1.10GHz (Processor Number ; 733)
Intel Celeron-M ULV Processor 900MHz (Processor Number ; 353)
‰ Chipset
The PORTEGE M300 is equipped with Intel 855GME (Montara-GM+) as North Bridge,
Intel ICH4-M as South Bridge and Texas Instrument PCI7421 as Card Controller.
‰ Memory
One 256MB memory is mounted on the system board. One DDR SO-DIMM slots is
available for installation of DDR333 (PC2700) compatible 256, 512MB and 1GB memory
module.
‰ HDD
2.5-inch one 30GB/40G/60GB/80GB/100GB HDD is supported.
‰ USB FDD (Option)
An external two-mode 3.5-inch FDD, which connects with a USB port, supports 720KB
and 1.44MB formats and enables booting the computer from a FDD.
‰ Optical devices
A DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive or DVD Super Multi drive is equipped.
‰ Display
12.1 XGA-TFT color display, resolution 1,024(H)×768(V), 16M colors
A high-resolution external monitor connected to the computer can display up to
2048(H)×1536(V), at 16M colors.
‰ Touch pad
Touch pad with two buttons is installed as a pointing device.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
‰ Keyboard
An-easy-to-use 85/86-key keyboard provides a numeric overlay for fast numeric data
entry.
‰ Docking port
Advanced Port Replicator III can be connected through docking port on the bottom.
Following functions are supported by Advanced Port Replicator III.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RJ 11 port
RJ45 port
LINE-IN port
LINE-OUT port
USB port
RGB connector port
Parallel port
Serial port
PS/2 connector port
DVI port
i.LINK (IEEE1394) [Not supported when docking with PORTEGE M300]
[Not supported when docking with PORTEGE M300]
‰ Button & Switch
TOSHIBA Assist Button and TOSHIBA Presentation Button are available. Also wireless
communication switch can turn on/off the power of bluetooth and wireless LAN function.
‰ Batteries
The computer has two batteries: a rechargeable Lithium-Ion main battery pack and RTC
battery (that backs up the Real Time Clock and CMOS memory).
‰ Universal Serial Bus (USB2.0)
Three USB ports are provided. The ports comply with the USB2.0 standard, which
enables data transfer speeds 40 times faster than USB1.1 standard. USB1.1 is also
supported.
‰ External monitor port
The external monitor port (RGB connector) supports VESA DDC2B compatible functions.
‰ PC card slot
The PC card slot (PCMCIA) accommodates one 5mm Type II card. (Based on PC Card
Standard, supporting CardBus)
1-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
‰ SD Card
A SD Card Slot can accommodate Secure Digital flash memory cards with various
capacities.
‰ CF Card
A CF Card Slot can accommodate compact flash memory cards with various capacities.
Dummy card is also equipped to prevent the slot from dust or dirt.
‰ Internal modem
The internal modem is equipped as a modem daughter card (MDC).
The internal modem provides capability for data and fax communication and supports
ITU-T V.90 (V.92) standard. For data reception it operates at 56Kbps and for data
transmission it operates at 33.6Kbps. For fax transmission it operates at 14,4Kbps. The
speed of data transfer and fax depends on analog telephone line conditions. It has an RJ11
modem jack for connecting to a telephone line.
‰ Internal LAN
The computer is equipped with LAN circuits that support Ethernet LAN (10 megabits per
second, 10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet LAN (100 megabits per second, 100 BASE-TX).
‰ i.LINK (IEEE1394)
This port enables high-speed data transfer directly from external devices such as digital
video cameras.
‰ Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN Card can be equipped with mini-PCI slot. Based on IEEE802.11b, b/g,
a/b/g with 2.45GHz/5.0GHz Dual-band antenna.
‰ Bluetooth
Bluetooth module can be equipped. This enables a communication to devices that support
Bluetooth Version 1.2/1.1. Adopting AFH (Adaptive Frequency Hopping), reduce the
interference with the wireless communication in 2.4GHz.
‰ Infrared port
The infrared port is compatible with Fast Infrared (FIR) standards enabling 4 Mbps, 1.152
Mbps, 115.2 kbps, 57.6 kbps, 38.4 kbps, 19.2 kbps or 9.6 kbps data transfer with Infrared
Data Association (IrDA) 1.1 compatible external devices.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
‰ Sound system
The sound system is equipped with the following features:
•
•
•
•
Built in stereo speakers
Built-in monaural microphone
Stereo Headphone jack (3.5mm mini headphone jack)
External microphone jack (3.5mm mini microphone jack)
1-4
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.1 Features
1 Hardware Overview
The front of the computer is shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Front of the computer
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.1 Features
The system unit configuration is shown in Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2 System unit configuration
1-6
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
1 Hardware Overview
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
Figure 1-3 is a block diagram of the system unit.
Figure 1-3 System unit block diagram
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
The system unit is composed of the following major components:
‰ Processor
¾ Intel ® Mobile Pentium ®-M ULV Processor 1.10GHz (Processor Number ; 733)
Core voltage : 0.94/0.81V
FSB : 400MHz
L1 cache : 64KB [32KB (Code) + 32KB (Data)]
L2 cache : 2MB
Support : Enhanced Intel® SpeedStep technology
¾ Intel ® Mobile Celeron ®-M ULV Processor 900MHz (Processor Number ; 353)
Core voltage : 0.94V
FSB : 400MHz
L1 cache : 64KB [32KB (Code) + 32KB (Data)]
L2 cache : 512MB
‰ Memory
One 256MB memory is mounted on the system board. One DDR SO-DIMM slots is
available for installation of DDR333 (PC2700) compatible 256, 512MB and 1GB memory
module.
¾ Supports DDR333 (PC2700)
¾ 2.5 volt operation
¾ 200 pin, SO Dual In-line Memory Modules (SO-DIMM)
‰ North Bridge ; Intel GMCH-M
¾ One Intel 855GME is used.
¾ Features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Memory Controller supporting DDR266/DDR333, Max 1280MB
Built in graphic controller
RGB, DVI,DVO interface
AGP interface(AGP V2.0), x4 mode
PCI Interface (R2.2)
ACPI 1.0
Supports Geyserville III
Supports Intel SpeedStep Technology
732-ball 37.5×37.5mm FC-BGA package
1-8
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
1 Hardware Overview
‰ South Bridge ; Intel ICH4-M (82801DBM)
¾ One Intel 82801DBM is used.
¾ This gate array has the following features:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PCI 3.3V/5V Tolerance interface
Provides Steerable PCI interrupt for PCI device P&P
Enhanced DMA controller
Interrupt controller
Counter / Timer
Supports Distribute DMA.
Supports PC/PCI DMA.
Supports Serial IRQ.
LPC host controller
Supports Plug-and-Play.
Supports ACPI
Internal PCI IDE Controller
USB interface
SMBus interface
Super I/O Interface
Audio system
SW modem interface
421-ball 31×31mm BGA Package
‰ PC Card Controller ; Texas Instruments (PCI7421)
¾ One PCI 7421 is used.
¾ This gate array has the following functions and components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PCI interface (PCI Revision2.2)
CardBus/PC Card controller (Yenta2 Version2.2)
SD/MMC card controller (SDHC Ver.1.2)
SD IO card controller (Ver.1.1)
Memory Stick/Memory Stick Pro Card Controller
xD Picture Card Controller
IEEE1394a Controller 2 port
BGA Package
‰ Firmware Hub (FWH)
One 4Mbit FWH (STMicro M50FW040N5G) is used.
‰ Sound Controller
AC-Link (South Bridge), STAC9750 (Sound Codec) and AN12941A-VF (Audio Amp)
are used.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.2 System Unit Block Diagram
‰ EC/KBC (Embedded Controller/Keyboard Controller)
One RENESAS M306KAFCLRP U0 chip functions as both EC and KBC.
‰ Other main system chips
¾ PSC (Toshiba-made TMP87PM48U)
¾ Super I/O (SMSC-made LPC47N217-JV)
¾ Clock Generator (ICS-made 950812CGLFT)
¾ RS-232C Driver (MAXIM-made MAX3243CAI+TG074)
¾ Audio AMP (Matsushita-made AN12941A-VF)
¾ AXIS accelerometer (STMicro-made LIS3L02AQ)
‰ Internal LAN Controller
One Kinnereth (82562ET) chip is used.
•
•
Supports 10/100Mbit Ethernet.
Supports LED and WOL.
‰ Wireless LAN Card
2.4GHz DSSS/OFDM, 5.0GHz OFDM wireless LAN card is equipped.
Conformity with IEEE 802.11b, b/g or a/b/g. Theoretical transfer speed is
maximum of 54Mbps (with 802.11a, 802.11g), 11Mbps (with 802.11b) and
108Mbps (with Turbo Mode of Atheros module type). Supports 128bit WEP.
1-10
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 USB 3.5-inch Floppy Disk Drive
1 Hardware Overview
1.3 USB Floppy Disk Drive
The USB FDD is a thin, high-performance reliable drive that supports 720KB and 1.44MB.
The FDD is shown in figure 1-4. The specifications for the FDD are listed in Table 1-1.
Figure 1-4 USB FDD
Table 1-1 USB FDD specifications
Items
FDD part
USB
720KB mode
1.44MB mode
Data transfer
rate
250K bits/second
500K bits/second
Full speed mode (12M bits/second)
300rpm 360rpm
5.3 track/mm (135TPI)
Disk rotation speed
Track density
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.4 Hard Disk Drive
1.4 Hard Disk Drive
A 30GB/40GB/60GB/80GB/100GB 2.5-inch HDD is supported.
The HDD is shown in Figure 1-5 and the specification is shown in Table 1-2 and Table 1-3.
Figure 1-5 HDD
1-12
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Hard Disk Drive
1 Hardware Overview
Table 1-2 HDD dimensions
Standard value
Parameter
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
HDD2190BZE02
HDD2191VZE02
HDD2194VZE02
Width (mm)
69.85
9.5
Outline
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)
dimensions
100.0
95
Standard value
Parameter
HGST
HGST
HGST
HGST
G8BC0001E311 G8BC0001E411 G8BC0001N611
G8BC0001N811
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)
69.85±0.25
9.5±0.2
Outline
dimensions
100.2±0.25
95 (max)
102
Standard value
Parameter
HGST
HGST
HGST
HGST
G8BC0001N410
G8BC0001N610 G8BC0001N810
G8BC0001NA10
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Weight (g)
69.85±0.25
Outline
9.5±0.2
dimensions
100.2±0.25
102 (max)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.4 Hard Disk Drive
Table 1-3 HDD Specifications (1/2)
Specification
TOSHIBA
HDD2190BZE02
TOSHIBA
HDD2194VZE02
TOSHIBA
HDD2191VZE02
Parameter
Storage size (formatted)
Speed (RPM)
40GB
4,200
60GB
80GB
5,400
Data transfer speed
(Mbits/s)
175.0-341.7
202.9-373.3
154.3-298.0
Interface transfer rate
(MB/s)
100 (Ultra DMA mode)
735
-
-
Storage density (Kbpi)
Track density (Ktpi)
88.1
88.8
78.9
Average random seek time
(read) (ms)
12
Average random seek time
(write) (ms)
12
4
Power-on-to-ready (sec)
Specification
HGST
HGST
HGST
HGST
Parameter
G8BC0001E311
G8BC0001E411
G8BC0001N611
G8BC0001N811
Storage size (formatted)
Speed (RPM)
30GB
40GB
60GB
80GB
4,200
Data transfer speed
(Mbits/s)
512
493
Interface transfer rate
(MB/s)
100 (Ultra DMA mode)
702
96
717
Storage density (Kbpi)
Track density (Ktpi)
96.6
Average random seek time
(read) (ms)
12
14
Average random seek time
(write) (ms)
Power-on-to-ready (sec)
3.0
3.5
1-14
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Hard Disk Drive
1 Hardware Overview
Table 1-3 HDD Specifications (2/2)
Specification
HGST
HGST
HGST
HGST
Parameter
G8BC0001N410
G8BC0001N610
G8BC0001N810
G8BC0001NA10
Storage size (formatted)
Speed (RPM)
40GB
60GB
80GB
100GB
5,400
Data transfer speed
(Mbits/s)
493
Interface transfer rate
(MB/s)
100 (Ultra DMA mode)
764 (MAX)
113.2
Storage density (Kbpi)
Track density (Ktpi)
Average random seek time
(read) (ms)
12
Average random seek time
(write) (ms)
14
Power-on-to-ready (sec)
3.5
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.5 Optical Drive
1.5 Optical Drive
1.5.1 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW Drive
The DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-
inch) CD/DVD-ROM and CD-R/RW. It is a high-performance drive that reads DVD at
maximum 8-speed and CD at maximum 24-speed.
The DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive is shown in Figure 1-6. The dimensions and
specifications of the DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive are described in Table 1-4, Table 1-5.
Figure 1-6 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive
Table 1-4 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive outline dimensions
Parameter
Maker
Standard value
MATSUSHITA
(G8CC00025110)
Width (mm)
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Mass (g)
128
12.7 (excluding projections)
129.0
Outline
dimensions
141±3
1-16
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5 Optical Drive
1 Hardware Overview
Table 1-5 DVD-ROM & CD-R/RW drive specifications
Drive Specification
Parameter
MATSUSHITA (G8CC00025110)
DVD-ROM MAX 8x CAV (MAX 10800 KB/s)
CD-ROM MAX 24x CAV (MAX 3600 KB/s)
Read (KB/s)
Write
CD-R 4x/8x (CLV), 16x (PCAV), MAX24x (CAV)
CD-RW 4x(CLV)
High Speed CD-RW 4x/8x/10x (CLV)
Ultra Speed CD-RW 10x (CLV), MAX24x (CAV)
Data transfer
speed
PIO mode16.6 MB/s PIO MODE4 supported
DMA mode16.6 MB/s Multi-word MODE2 supported
Ultra DMA mode 33.3 MB/s Ultra DMA MODE2
ATAPI interface
(MB/s)
CD-ROM
150 (Random)
170 (Random)
2MB
Access time
(ms)
DVD-ROM
Buffer memory
CD-DA,CD-ROM,CD-ROM XA
CD-R,CD-RW
CD
Photo CD, Video CD
CD-Extra(CD+),CD-text
Supported disk
format
DVD-ROM,DVD-R (DVD-R Multi-boarder supported)
DVD-RW(Ver.1.1)
DVD
DVD-RAM(2.6GB/4.7GB)
DVD+R, DVD+RW
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.5 Optical Drive
1.5.2 DVD Super Multi Drive
The DVD Super Multi drive accommodates either 12 cm (4.72-inch) or 8 cm (3.15-inch)
CD/DVD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD±R/±RW and DVD-RAM. It is a high-performance drive
that reads DVD-ROM at maximum 8-speed and CD at maximum 24-speed. It writes CD at
maximum 24-speed.
The DVD Super Multi drive is shown in Figure 1-7. The dimensions and specifications of the
DVD Super Multi drive are described in Table 1-6, Table 1-7.
Figure 1-7 DVD Super Multi drive
Table 1-6 DVD Super Multi drive outline dimensions
Parameter
Standard value
MATSUSHITA
MATSUSHITA
Maker
(G8CC00026110)
(G8CC00026112)
Width (mm)
128
Outline
dimensions
Height (mm)
Depth (mm)
Mass (g)
9.5 (excluding projections)
129.0
145±10
1-18
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5 Optical Drive
1 Hardware Overview
Table 1-7 DVD Super Multi drive specifications (1/2)
Drive Specification
Parameter
MATSUSHITA (G8CC00026110)
DVD-ROM MAX 8x CAV
CD-ROM MAX 24x CAV
Read(KB/s)
CD-R 4x/8x (CLV), 12x/16x/24x (Zone CLV)
CD-RW 4x (CLV)
High Speed CD-RW 4x/8x/10x (CLV)
Ultra Speed CD-RW 8x/10x (CLV)
DVD-R 1x/2x (CLV)
Data transfer
speed
Write
DVD-RW 1x/2x (CLV)
DVD+R 2.4x (CLV)
DVD+RW 2.4x (CLV)
DVD-RAM 2x (ZCLV) (4.7GB/9.4GB)
PIO mode 16.6 MB/s (PIO MODE4 supported)
DMA mode 16.6 MB/s (Multi-ward MODE2 supported)
Ultra DMA mode 33.3 MB/s(Ultra DMA MODE2 supported)
ATAPI interface
(MB/s)
CD-ROM
150 (Random)
180 (Random)
2MB
Access time
(ms)
DVD-ROM
Buffer memory
CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-ROM XA,
Photo CD, Video-CD, CD-Extra(CD+),CD-text
CD
Supported disk
format
DVD-ROM, DVD-R(3.9GB/4.7GB), DVD-RW (Ver1.1)
DVD+R/+RW, DVD Video,
DVD
DVD-RAM (2.6GB/4.7GB/9.4GB)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.5 Optical Drive
Table 1-7 DVD Super Multi drive specifications (2/2)
Drive Specification
Parameter
MATSUSHITA (G8CC00026112)
DVD-ROM MAX 8x CAV
CD-ROM MAX 24x CAV
Read(KB/s)
CD-R 4x/8x (CLV), 12x/16x/24x (Zone CLV)
CD-RW 4x (CLV)
High Speed CD-RW 4x/8x/10x (CLV)
Ultra Speed CD-RW 8x/10x (CLV)
DVD-R 1x/2x (CLV)
Data transfer
speed
Write
DVD-RW 1x/2x (CLV)
DVD+R 2.4x (CLV)
DVD+RW 2.4x (CLV)
DVD-RAM 2x (ZCLV) (4.7GB/9.4GB)
PIO mode 16.6 MB/s (PIO MODE4 supported)
DMA mode 16.6 MB/s (Multi-ward MODE2 supported)
Ultra DMA mode 33.3 MB/s(Ultra DMA MODE2 supported)
ATAPI interface
(MB/s)
CD-ROM
150 (Random)
180 (Random)
2MB
Access time
(ms)
DVD-ROM
Buffer memory
CD-DA, CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-ROM XA,
Photo CD, Video-CD, CD-Extra(CD+),CD-text
CD
Supported disk
format
DVD-ROM, DVD-R(3.9GB/4.7GB), DVD-RW (Ver1.1)
DVD+R/+RW, DVD Video,
DVD
DVD-RAM (2.6GB/4.7GB/9.4GB)
1-20
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.6 Keyboard
1 Hardware Overview
1.6 Keyboard
A keyboard which consists of 85/86-key is mounted on the system unit. The keyboard is
connected to the system board and controlled by the keyboard controller
Figure 1-8 is a view of the keyboard.
See Appendix E about a layout of the keyboard.
Figure 1-8 keyboard
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.7 TFT Color Display
1.7 TFT Color Display
The TFT color display consists of 12.1-inch XGA LCD module and FL inverter board.
1.7.1 LCD Module
The LCD module displays in resolution of 1024(H)×768(V), 16M colors.
Figure 1-9 shows a view of the LCD module and Table 1-8 lists the specifications.
Figure 1-9 LCD module
Table 1-8 LCD module specifications
Specifications
Item
12.1-inch XGA (G33C00027110)
Number of Dots
1,024 (W) x 768 (H)
0.240 (H) x 0.240 (V)
245.76 (H) x 184.32(V)
Dot spacing (mm)
Display range (mm)
1-22
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.7 TFT Color Display
1 Hardware Overview
1.7.2 FL Inverter Board
The FL inverter board supplies a high frequency current to illuminate the LCD module FL.
Table 1-9 lists the FL inverter board specifications.
Table 1-9 FL inverter board specifications
Specifications
Item
G71C0002K210
Input
Voltage (V)
Power (W)
5.0 (DC)
4.0
Output
Voltage (V)
Power (W / V)
750 (r.m.s)
3.6W / 5VA
Current (mA)
(f=70KHz)
4.22 (r.m.s)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.8 Power Supply
1.8 Power Supply
The power supply supplies many different voltages to the system board and performs the
following functions:
1. Judges that the DC power supply (AC adapter) is connected to the computer.
2. Detects DC output and circuit malfunctions.
3. Controls the battery icon, and DC IN icon.
4. Turns the battery charging system on and off and detects a fully charged battery.
5. Turns the power supply on and off.
6. Provides more accurate detection of a low battery.
7. Calculates the remaining battery capacity.
8. Controls the transmission of the status signal of the main battery.
The power supply output rating is specified in Table 1-10.
1-24
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.8 Power Supply
1 Hardware Overview
Table 1-10 Power supply output rating (1/2)
Power supply (Yes/No)
Name
Voltage
Power OFF
Power OFF
No
Object
[V]
(Suspend mode)
(Boot mode)
Battery
0.748-
1.484
No
No
No
CPU(VCC)
PPV
1.05
1.8
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
CPU(VCC), GMCH, ICH4-M
CPU(VCCA0)
PTV
1R8-P1V
1R35-P1V
A1R35-P1V
2R5-B2V
Q2R5-B2V
1.35
1.35
2.5
No
GMCH
No
GMCH(VCCASM)
GMCH, DDR-SDRAM
GMCH(VCCQSM)
Yes
Yes
2.5
SO-DIM DDR-SDRAM(VREF),
GMCH
1.25
Yes
No
No
MR1R25-B1V
1.25
1.5
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On board DDR SDRAM(VREF)
ICH4-M
1R25M-B1V
1R5-S1V
Yes
ICH4-M. EC/KBC,
(Acceleration sensor)
3.3
5.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
S3V
M5V
ICH4-M. Thermal RESET IC,
Docker(PnP ID EEPROM),
LEDs,
5.0
5.0
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
PSC
MCV
E5V
No
PC Card Power, USB Power
PCI7421, 1394 EEPROM,
PC/CF/SD Card Power,
Mini PCI, LAN Power,
3.3
Yes
No
No
E3V
RS232C Driver/Receiver, MDC
3.3
3.3
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
SD Card
FM-E3V
PCI7421(1394 OHCI)
[Connected to E3V]
PHY-E3V
ICH4-M, LAN PHY, LAN LED
[Connected to E3V]
3.3
Yes
No
No
LAN-E3V
1.5
3.3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
ICH4-M
LAN1R5-E1V
MCVCCA-EYV
MCVCCB-EYV
MCVPPB-EYV
PCI7421, CardBus A (CF)
PCI7421, CardBus B (PC-card)
CardBus B (PC-card)
3.3/5.0
5.0
ICH4-M(VCCRTC),
32.768KHz generator
2.0-3.5
Yes
Yes
Yes
R3V
1.25
1.5
No
No
No
No
No
No
DDR-SDRAM(Termination)
GMCH(DVO), ICH4-M
1R25-P1V
1R5-P1V
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.8 Power Supply
Table 1-10 Power supply output rating (2/2)
Power supply (Yes/No)
Name
Voltage
[V]
Power OFF
Suspend mode
Power OFF
Boot mode
No
Battery
Object
Clock Generator, Thermal
Sensor, GMCH, ICH4-M,
SO-DIMM(SPD), HDD, FIR,
Mini-PCI, FWH, Super I/O,
AC97 Codec, HP Amp,
Acceleration sensor,
3.3
No
No
No
P3V
P5V
ICH4-M, HDD, Mini-PCI,
KB(LED), PAD, LEDs, HDD
RESET, Parallel, RGB(DDC)
5.0
No
No
No
5.0
5.0
5.0
FL Inverter
CRT
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FL-P5V
DDC-P5V
SND-P5V
Speaker Amp
AC97 Codec, Speaker Amp, MIC
Amp, Line-IN, Line-OUT
4.7
No
No
No
A4R7-P4V
5.0
3.3
3.3
5.0
ODD, ODD RESET
LCD
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
ODD-P5V
PNL-P3V
BT-P3V
IF-P5V
Bluetooth Module
Docker (PS/2)
1-26
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.9 Batteries
1 Hardware Overview
1.9 Batteries
The computer has two types of batteries as follows:
‰
‰
Main battery pack
RTC battery
The battery specifications are listed in Table 1-11.
Table 1-11 Battery specifications
Output
Capacity
voltage
Battery name
G71C0004G110
Material
6 Cell
4,700mAh
10.8V
G71C0004G210
G71C0003W110
G71C0003W210
Main battery
Lithium-Ion
12 Cell
8,800mAh
RTC battery
P71035009115
Nickel hydrogen
2.4V
16mAh
1.9.1 Main Battery
The removable main battery pack is the computer’s main power source when the AC adaptor
is not attached. The main battery maintains the state of the computer when the computer
enters in standby mode.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.9 Batteries
1.9.2 Battery Charging Control
Battery charging is controlled by a power supply microprocessor. The power supply
microprocessor controls power supply and detects a full charge when the AC adapter and
battery are connected to the computer.
θ Battery Charge
When the AC adapter is connected, normal charging is used while the system is turned on
and quick charge is used while the system is turned off. Refer to the following Table 1-12.
Table 1-12 Time required for charges of main battery
Condition
Charging Time
About 4.0 to 5.5 (hours)
About 6.0 to 9.0 (hours)
About 3.0 (hours)
4700mAh
8800mAh
4700mAh
8800mAh
Normal charge
(Power on)
Quick charge
(Power off)
About 4.5 (hours)
Charge is stopped in the following cases.
1. The main battery is fully charged
2. The main battery is removed
3. Main battery or AC adapter voltage is abnormal
4. Charging current is abnormal
θ Data preservation time
When turning off the power in being charged fully, the preservation time is as
following Table 1-13.
Table 1-13 Data preservation time
Condition
preservation time
About 5 days
4700mAh
8800mAh
4700mAh
8800mAh
Standby mode
About 9 days
About 40 days
About 80 days
Power off
1-28
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.9 Batteries
1 Hardware Overview
1.9.3 RTC battery
The RTC battery provides power to keep the current date, time and other setup information
in memory while the computer is turned off. Table 1-14 lists the charging time and data
preservation period of the RTC battery.
Table 1-14 RTC battery charging time
Condition
Time
Power ON (Lights Power LED)
Data preservation tome (Full-charged)
About 8 hours
About 30 days
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Hardware Overview
1.10 AC Adapter
1.10 AC Adapter
The AC adapter is used to charge the battery.
Table 1-15 lists the AC adapter specifications.
Table 1-15 AC adapter specifications
Parameter
Specification
G71C0002S31
G71C0001A31
0
G71C00049210
[Option]
G71C0004A210
0
Power
45W
60W
75W
Input voltage
Input frequency
Input voltage
Output voltage
Output current
100V to 240V
50Hz/60Hz
0.6A to1.1A
0A to 3.0A
1.5A or less
DC 15V
0A to 4.0A
5.0A
1-30
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Troubleshooting Procedures
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2-ii
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Chapter 2
Contents
2.1
2.2
2.3
Troubleshooting..........................................................................................................2-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart ........................................................................................2-3
Power Supply Troubleshooting ..................................................................................2-7
Procedure 1 Icon Check ...................................................................................2-7
Procedure 2 Error Code Check ........................................................................2-9
Procedure 3 Connection Check......................................................................2-15
Procedure 4 Charge Check.............................................................................2-16
Procedure 5 Replacement Check....................................................................2-17
System Board Troubleshooting ................................................................................2-18
Procedure 1 Message Check ..........................................................................2-19
Procedure 2 Debugging Port Check on Boot Mode.......................................2-21
Procedure 3 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-29
Procedure 4 Replacement Check....................................................................2-30
USB FDD Troubleshooting......................................................................................2-31
Procedure 1 FDD Head Cleaning Check........................................................2-31
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-32
Procedure 3 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-33
HDD Troubleshooting..............................................................................................2-34
Procedure 1 Message Check ..........................................................................2-34
Procedure 2 Partition Check...........................................................................2-35
Procedure 3 Format Check.............................................................................2-36
Procedure 4 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-37
Procedure 5 Connector Check and Replacement Check................................2-38
Keyboard Troubleshooting.......................................................................................2-39
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-39
Procedure 2 Connector and Replacement Check...........................................2-40
Touch pad Troubleshooting......................................................................................2-41
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check ...............................2-41
Procedure 2 Connector and Replacement Check...........................................2-41
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.9
Display Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-42
Procedure 1 External Monitor Check............................................................ 2-42
Procedure 2 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-42
Procedure 3 Connector and Cable Check...................................................... 2-43
Procedure 4 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-44
2.10 Optical drive Troubleshooting................................................................................. 2-45
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-45
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check ............................... 2-45
2.11 Modem Troubleshooting.......................................................................................... 2-46
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-46
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check ............................... 2-46
2.12 LAN Troubleshooting.............................................................................................. 2-48
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-48
Procedure 2 Connector Check and Replacement Check ............................... 2-48
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting............................................................................... 2-49
Procedure 1 Transmitting-Receiving Check ................................................. 2-49
Procedure 2 Antenna Connection Check....................................................... 2-50
Procedure 3 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-51
2.14 Bluetooth Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 2-52
Procedure 1 Transmitting-Receiving Check ................................................. 2-52
Procedure 2 Antenna Connection Check....................................................... 2-53
Procedure 3 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-54
2.15 Sound Troubleshooting............................................................................................ 2-55
Procedure 1 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check .............................. 2-55
Procedure 2 Connector Check....................................................................... 2-55
Procedure 3 Replacement Check................................................................... 2-56
2-iv
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Figures
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Troubleshooting flowchart .............................................................................2-4
A set of tool for debug port test....................................................................2-21
Tables
Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Table 2-5
Table 2-6
Battery Icon ....................................................................................................2-7
DC IN icon .....................................................................................................2-8
Error code .....................................................................................................2-10
Debug port error status.................................................................................2-22
FDD error code and status............................................................................2-32
Hard disk drive error code and status...........................................................2-37
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2-vi
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.1 Troubleshooting
2
2.1 Troubleshooting
Chapter 2 describes how to determine which Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) in the computer
is causing the computer to malfunction. (The “FRU” means the replaceable unit in the field.)
The FRUs covered are:
1. Power supply
2. System Board
3. USB FDD
4. 2.5” HDD
6. Touch pad
7. Display
11. Wireless LAN
12. Bluetooth
13. Sound
8. Optical Drive
9. Modem
5. Keyboard
10. LAN
The Test Program operations are described in Chapter 3. Detailed replacement procedures are
described in Chapter 4.
NOTE: 1. When replacing the system board, make sure to follow the procedures below.
(1) Execute the subtest03 DMI information save of 3.3 Setting of the hardware
configuration in Chapter 3 in order to save DMI data from the old system board
to Floppy disk.
(2) Copy the DMI data to a new system board by executing the subtest04 DMI
information recovery and subtest08 System configuration display.
The implement for the Diagnostics procedures is referred to Chapter 3. Also, following
implements are necessary:
1. Phillips screwdrivers (For replacement procedures)
2. Implements for debugging port check
• Toshiba MS-DOS system FD
• RS-232C cross cable
• Test board with debug port test cable
• PC for displaying debug port test result
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.1 Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
There are following two types of connections in the figure of board and module connection in
and after 2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting.
(1) Cable connection is described in the figure as line.
(2) Pin connection is described in the figure as arrow.
<e.g> Connection of modem
2-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
Use the flowchart in Figure 2-1 as a guide for determining which troubleshooting procedures
to execute. Before going through the flowchart steps, verify the following:
‰ Ask him or her to enter the password if a password is registered.
‰ Verify with the customer that Toshiba Windows is installed on the hard disk. Non-
Windows operating systems can cause the computer to malfunction.
‰ Make sure all optional equipment is removed from the computer.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (1/2)
2-4
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
Figure 2-1 Troubleshooting flowchart (2/2)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Troubleshooting Flowchart
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
If the diagnostics program cannot detect an error, the problem may be intermittent. The
Running Test program should be executed several times to isolate the problem. Check the
Log Utilities function to confirm which diagnostic test detected an error, then perform the
appropriate troubleshooting procedures as follows:
1. If an error is detected on the System Test, Memory Test, Real Timer Test, perform
the System Board and Processor Module Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.4.
2. If an error is detected on the floppy disk test, perform the USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.5.
3. If an error is detected on the hard disk test, perform the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.6.
4. If an error is detected on the Pressed key display test (in Only One Test) and Pressed
key code Display test (in DIAGNOSTIC test), perform the Keyboard Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.7.
5. If an error is detected on the Touch pad test (in Only One Test), perform the Touch
pad Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.8.
6. If an error is detected on the display test, perform the Display Troubleshooting
Procedures in Section 2.9.
7. If an error is detected on the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, perform the Optical drive
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.10.
8. If an error is detected on the modem test (in LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
disk), perform the Modem Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.11.
9. If an error is detected on the LAN test (in LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
disk), perform the LAN Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.12.
10. If an error is detected on the Wireless LAN test (in Wireless LAN test disk), perform
the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.13.
11. If an error is detected on the Bluetooth test (in LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
disk), perform the Bluetooth Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.14.
12. If an error is detected on the sound test (in Sound test disk), perform the Sound
Troubleshooting Procedures in Section 2.15.
2-6
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
The power supply controls many functions and components. To determine if the power
supply is functioning properly, start with Procedure 1 and continue with the other Procedures
as instructed. The procedures described in this section are:
Procedure 1: Icon Check
Procedure 2: Error Code Check
Procedure 3: Connection Check
Procedure 4: Charge Check
Procedure 5: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Icon Check
The following Icons indicate the power supply status:
‰ Battery icon
‰ DC IN icon
The power supply controller displays the power supply status through the Battery icon and
the DC IN icon as listed in Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 below. To check the power supply status,
install a battery pack and connect an AC adapter.
Table 2-1 Battery Icon
Battery icon
Lights orange
Power supply status
Battery is charged and the external DC is input. It has no
relation with ON/OFF of the system power.
Lights green
Battery is fully charged and the external DC is input. It has
no relation with ON/OFF of the system power.
Blinks orange
The battery level is low while the system power is ON.
(even intervals)
Blinks orange once
(at being switched on)
The system is driven by only a battery and the battery level
is low.
Doesn’t light
Any condition other than those above.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-2 DC IN icon
DC IN icon
Power supply status
Lights green
Blinks orange
Doesn’t light
DC power is being supplied from the AC adapter.
Power supply malfunction*1
Any condition other than those above.
*1 When the power supply controller detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon
blinks and an error code is displayed.
When the icon is blinking, perform the following procedure.
1. Remove the battery pack and the AC adapter.
2. Re-attach the battery pack and the AC adapter.
If the icon is still blinking after the operation above, check the followings:
Check 1If the DC IN icon blinks orange, go to Procedure 2.
Check 2If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 3.
Check 3If the battery icon does not light orange or green, go to Procedure 4.
NOTE: Use a supplied AC adapter G71C0001A310, G71C0002S310, G71C0004A210 or
G71C00049210 (Option).
2-8
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Error Code Check
If the power supply microprocessor detects a malfunction, the DC IN icon blinks orange. The
blink pattern indicates an error as shown below.
‰ Start
Off for 2 seconds
‰ Error code (8 bit)
“1”
On for one second
On for a half second
Off for a half second
“0”
Interval between data bits
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Example: Error code = 12h (Error codes are given in hexadecimal format.)
Start
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Check 1 Convert the DC IN icon blink pattern into the hexadecimal error code and
compare it to the tables below.
Table 2-3 Error code
Error code
1*h
Where Error occurs
DC Power (AC Adapter)
Main battery
2*h
3*h
Second battery
S3V output
4*h
5*h
1R5-C1V output
1R5-C1V output
PPV output
6*h
7*h
8*h
PTV output
9*h
E5V output
A*h
B*h
C*h
D*h
E*h
F*h
E3V output
PPV output
1R35-P1V output
1R25-P1V output
2R5-B2V output
-
2-10
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Check 1 Compare the patterns in the hexadecimal error code to the tables below.
‰ DC IN (AC Adapter, DS9, CDOC)
Error code
10h
Meaning
AC Adaptor output voltage is over 16.5 V.
11h
Advanced Port Replicator output voltage is over 16.5 V.
Current from the DC power supply is over 7.0A.
Current from the DC power supply is over 0.5A when there is no load.
Current sensing IC is not normal when there is no load.
12h
13h
14h
‰ Main Battery
Error code
20h
Meaning
Over voltage has been sensed. (Error code 20h is not supported.)
Main battery charge current is over 7.00 A.
21h
22h
Main battery discharge current is over 0.5 A when there is no load.
23h
Main battery charge current is over 3.10 A when the AC adapter is not
directly connected.
24h
25h
Current sensing IC is not normal when there is no load.
Main battery charge current is over 0.3 A when the charging is off.
‰ Second Battery
Error code
Meaning
30h
31h
32h
33h
Over voltage has been sensed. (Error code 30h is not supported.)
Second battery charge current is over 7.00 A.
Second battery discharge current is over 0.5 A when there is no load.
Second battery charge current is over 3.10 A when the AC adapter is
not directly connected.
34h
35h
Current sensing IC is not normal when there is no load.
Second battery charge current is over 0.3 A when the charging is off.
‰ S3V output ; (When Power OFF = S3V, When Power ON = E3V)
Error code
40h
Meaning
S3V voltage is 2.81 V or less when the computer is powered on/off.
S3V voltage is 2.81 V or less at power on when the charging is off.
45h
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
‰ 1R5-C1V output (P61)
Error code
Meaning
50h
51h
52h
53h
54h
1R5-C1V voltage is over 1.80 V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is powered on.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is booting up.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is suspended.
1R5-C1V voltage is not normal when the computer is shut down.
(CV support)
55h
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less at power on. (CV support)
‰ 1R5-C1V output (P62)
Error code
Meaning
60h
61h
62h
63h
64h
1R5-C1V voltage is over 2.16 V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is powered on.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is booting up.
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less when the computer is suspended.
1R5-C1V voltage is not normal when the computer is shut down.
(CV support)
65h
1R5-C1V voltage is 1.275V or less at power on. (CV support)
‰ PPV output (P63 :MUX_CH0)
Error code
Meaning
70h
71h
72h
73h
PPV voltage is over 1.80 V when the computer is powered on/off.
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or less when the computer is powered on.
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or less when the computer is booting up.
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or over when the computer is powered off.
‰ PTV output (P64)
Error code
Meaning
80h
81h
82h
83h
84h
PTV voltage is over 1.80 V when the computer is powered on/off.
PTV voltage is 0.68 V or less when the computer is powered on.
PTV voltage is 0.68 V or less when the computer is booting up.
PTV voltage is 0.68 V or over when the computer is powered off.
PTV voltage is 0.68 V or less when the computer is suspended.
2-12
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
‰ E5V output (P65)
Error code
Meaning
90h
91h
92h
93h
94h
E5V voltage is over 6.00V when the computer is powered on/off.
E5V voltage is 4.50 V or less when the computer is powered on.
E5V voltage is 4.50 V or less when the computer is booting up.
E5V voltage is 4.50 V or over when the computer is powered off.
E5V voltage is 4.50 V or less when the computer is suspended.
‰ E3V output (P66)
Error code
Meaning
A0h
A1h
A2h
A3h
A4h
E3V voltage is over 3.96 V when the computer is powered on/off.
E3V voltage is 2.81 V or less when the computer is powered on.
E3V voltage is 2 .81 V or less when the computer is booting up.
E3V voltage is 2.81 V or over when the computer is powered off.
E3V voltage is 2.81 V or less when the computer is suspended.
‰ PPV output (P63:CH1)
Error code
Meaning
B0h
B1h
B2h
B3h
PPV voltage is over 1.80 V when the computer is powered on/off.
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or less when the computer is powered on.
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or less when the computer is booting up.
PPV voltage is 0.56 V or over when the computer is powered off.
‰ 1R35-P1V output (P73)
Error code
Meaning
C0h
C1h
C2h
C3h
C4h
1R35-P1V voltage is over 1.62V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R35-P1V voltage is 0.68 V or less when the computer is powered on.
1R35-P1V voltage is 0.68 V or less when the computer is booting up.
1R35-P1V voltage is 0.68 V or over when the computer is powered off.
1R35-P1V voltage is 0.68 V or less when the computer is suspended.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
‰ 1R25-P1V output (P75)
Error code
Meaning
D0h
D1h
D2h
D3h
D4h
1R25-P1V voltage is over 1.50 V when the computer is powered on/off.
1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063 V or less when the computer is powered on.
1R25-P1V voltage 1.063 V or less when the computer is booting up.
1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063 V or over when the computer is powered off.
1R25-P1V voltage is 1.063 V or less when the computer is suspended.
‰ 2R5-B2V output (P77)
Error code
Meaning
E0h
E1h
E2h
E3h
E4h
2R5-B2V voltage is over 3.00 V when the computer is powered on/off.
2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125 V or less when the computer is powered on.
2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125V or less when the computer is booting up.
2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125 V or over when the computer is powered off.
2R5-B2V voltage is 2.125 V or less when the computer is suspended.
Check 2 In the case of error code 10h or 12h:
‰ Make sure the AC adapter and AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC IN 15
V socket and wall outlet. If the cables are connected firmly, go to the following step:
‰ Connect a new AC adapter and AC power cord. If the problem still occurs, go to
Procedure 5.
Check 3 In the case of error code 21h:
‰ Go to Procedure 3.
Check 4 For any other errors, go to Procedure 5.
2-14
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Connection Check
The power is supplied as shown below:
Any of the connectors may be disconnected. Perform Check 1.
Check 1 Make sure the AC adapter and the AC power cord are firmly plugged into the DC
IN 15 V socket and wall outlet. If these cables are connected correctly, go to
Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure the DC-IN harness is firmly plugged to the connector on the system
board. If the harness is connected correctly, go to Check 3.
Check 3 Replace the AC adapter and the AC power cord with new ones.
• If the DC IN icon does not light, go to Procedure 5.
• If the battery icon does not light, go to Check 4.
Check 4 Make sure the battery pack is installed in the computer correctly. If the battery is
properly installed and the battery icon still does not light, go to Procedure 4.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4
Charge Check
Check if the power supply controller charges the battery pack properly. Perform the
following procedures:
Check 1 Make sure the AC adapter is firmly plugged into the DC IN socket.
Check 2 Make sure the battery pack is properly installed. If the battery is properly
installed, go to Check 3.
Check 3 The battery pack may be completely discharged. Wait a few minutes to charge the
battery pack while connecting the battery pack and the AC adapter. If the battery
pack is still not charged, go to Check 4.
Check 4 The battery’s temperature is too high or low. Return the temperature to normal
operating condition. If the battery pack is still not charged, go to Check 5.
Check 5 Replace the battery pack with a new one. If the battery pack is still not charged,
go to Procedure 5.
2-16
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.3 Power Supply Troubleshooting
Procedure 5
Replacement Check
The system board, DC-IN harness or AC adapter may be disconnected or damaged. Replace
the system board or AC adapter with a new one following the steps described in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures.
When AC adapter is connected ;
Check 1 AC adapter may be faulty. Replace the AC adapter with a new one. If the problem
still occurs, perform Check 2.
Check 2 DC-IN harness may be faulty. Replace the DC-IN harness with a new one. If the
problem still occurs, perform Check 3.
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace the system board with a new one.
When AC adapter is not connected ;
(When driving with battery pack)
Check 1 Battery pack may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 2.
Check 2 System board may be faulty. Replace the system board with a new one.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the system board is functioning properly. Perform
the steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as
required.
Procedure 1: Message Check
Procedure 2: Debugging port Check on Boot Mode
Procedure 3: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
2-18
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Procedure 1
Message Check
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. The IRT tests each IC on the system board and initializes it.
‰ If an error message is shown on the display, perform Check 1.
‰ If there is no error message, go to Procedure 2.
‰ If MS-DOS is properly loaded, go to Procedure 4.
Check 1 If one of the following error messages is displayed on the screen, press the F1 key
as the message instructs. These errors occur when the system configuration
preserved in the RTC memory (CMOS type memory) is not the same as the actual
configuration or when the data is lost.
If you press the F1 key as the message instructs, the SETUP screen appears to set
the system configuration. If any other error message is displayed, perform Check
2.
(a) *** Bad HDD type ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(b) *** Bad RTC battery ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(c) *** Bad configuration ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(d) *** Bad memory size ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(e) *** Bad time function ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(f) *** Bad check sum (CMOS) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
(g) *** Bad check sum (ROM) ***
Check system. Then press [F1] key ......
Check 2 If the following error message is displayed on the screen press any key as the
message instructs.
The following error message appears when data stored in RAM less the resume
function is lost because the battery has become discharged or the system board is
damaged. Go to Procedure 3.
WARNING: RESUME FAILURE.
PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
If any other error message is displayed, perform Check 3.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Check 3 The IRT checks the system board. When the IRT detects an error, the system
stops or an error message appears.
If one of the following error messages (1) through (17), (23) or (24) is displayed,
go to Procedure 4.
If error message (18) is displayed, go to the Keyboard Troubleshooting
Procedures.
If error message (19), (20) or (21) is displayed, go to the HDD Troubleshooting
Procedures.
If error message (22) is displayed, go to the USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedures.
(1) PIT ERROR
(2) MEMORY REFRESH ERROR
(3) TIMER CH.2 OUT ERROR
(4) CMOS CHECKSUM ERROR
(5) CMOS BAD BATTERY ERROR
(6) FIRST 64KB MEMORY ERROR
(7) FIRST 64KB MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(8) VRAM ERROR
(9) SYSTEM MEMORY ERROR
(10) SYSTEM MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(11) EXTENDED MEMORY ERROR
(12) EXTENDED MEMORY PARITY ERROR
(13) DMA PAGE REGISTER ERROR
(14) DMAC #1 ERROR
(15) DMAC #2 ERROR
(16) PIC #1 ERROR
(17) PIC #2 ERROR
(18) KBC ERROR
(19) HDC ERROR
(20) HDD #0 ERROR
(21) HDD #1 ERROR
(22) NO FDD ERROR
(23) TIMER INTERRUPT ERROR
(24) RTC UPDATE ERROR
2-20
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Debugging Port Check on Boot Mode
Check the D port status by a debug port test. The tool for debug port test is shown below.
Figure 2-2 A set of tool for debug port test
The test procedures are follows;
1. Connect the debug test cable to the connector CN3400 of the system board. For the
position of debug port on the system board, refer to Appendix B. For disassembling to
connect the test cable, refer to Chapter 4.
2. Connect the debug port test cable and RS-232C cross-cable to the test board.
3. Connect the RS-232C cross-cable to the PC that displays the results.
4. Boot the computer in MS-DOS mode.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
5. Execute GETDPORT.COM in the text menu in CPU REAL mode. (Insert the FD for
starting D port into FDD and input “FD starting drive:>dport”.)
The D port status is displayed in the following form;
6. When the D port status is FFFFh (normal status), go to Procedure 3.
7. When the D port status falls into any status in Table 2-4, execute Check 1.
Table 2-4 Debug port error status (1/7)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
F000h
Clear of software reset bit
Permission of A20 line
Initialization of special register and M1535
PIT CH0 initialization (for HOLD_ON)
BIOS rewrite factor flag initialization
Check sum check
(FEFC0000h-FEFF7FFFh)
Transition to protected mode
Boot block checksum
Program halt when check sum error
Checksum other than boot block
EC/KBC rewrite check
F001h
F002h
BIOS rewrite process when rewrite is
requested
KBC initialization sequence
Send KB Enables command.
Check F12 key
Initialization of security controller
BIOS rewrite request check
F003h
-F005h
Check sum error except BootBlock
when “F12 rewrite” is requested
F006h
F007h
BIOS signature check
BIOS rewrite process
Transition to System BIOS IRT
BIOS rewrite
Initialization of H/W of unique function
for each model
Initialization of I/O space for GPIO
Permission of BIOS writing
Serial interrupt control
2-22
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-4 Debug port error status (2/7)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
(F007h)
Releasing of BIOS write-protection
Enables the I/O space of SMBus
Permission of SMBus accesses
Configuration of DRAM
Permission of cache (only for L1 cache)
MEMEORY CLEAR
F008h
F009h
Transition to RAM BIOS from ROM BIOS
Saving of key scan code
Setting of TASK_1ms_TSC
Display message in navigation panel
(EC/KBC UPDATE,
BIOS UPDATE/DAMEGED)
Key input
Reading of
CHGBIOSA.EXE/CHGFIRMA.EXE
FDC RESET
Setting of parameters for 2HD (1.44MB),
Setting of transmission rate
Reading of first sector, If it is the data of
1.44MB (2HD), the media type is definite
Setting of parameters for 2DD (720KB),
Setting of transmission rate
Retrieval of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” from the
root directory.
Calculates the directory start header and
sector.
Reading one sector of the root directory.
Retrieval the entry of “CHGBIOSA.EXE”
and “CHGFIRMA.EXE” from the sector
read.
Reading of EXE header of
Key input when error
“CHGBIOSA.EXE” and “CHGFIRMA.EXE”
Execution of “CHGBIOSA.EXE” and
“CHGFIRMA.EXE”
F100h
F101h
Initialization of PIT channel 1
DRAM type & check size
Setting “30μs” to the refresh interval
Only when cold booting
Checking DRAM size
If DRAM size is "0", the program halt
Stack field test of SM-RAM
Program halt when it’s not used as stack
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-4 Debug port error status (3/7)
D port status
Inspection items
Cache configuration
Details
F102h
Permission of cache
(Only for L1 cache)
CMOS access test
Program halt when error
(Only when Cold booting)
COMS battery level check
CMOS Check sum check
CMOS data initialization (1)
IRT status setting
Setting “Boot status” and “IRT busy
flag” and “0” to the remaining bits.
Storing of DRAM size
Resume branch check
F103h
(Only when cold booting)
In the case of CMOS error, no resume
occurs.
If “resume status code” is not set, no
resume occurs.
Resume error check
ICH4-M Power Failure Error
SM-RAM checksum error
Memory configuration change check
Checksum of system BIOS RAM area
Go go resume process (RESUME_MAIN)
Resume error process
(Resume error 7AH)
(Resume error 73H)
(Resume error 73H)
(Resume error 79H)
Prohibition of all SMI
Clears resume status
Return to ROM.
Forwards the area of C0000h to EFFFFh
to PCI
(Prohibition of DRAM)
Set resume error request
Copying ROM/RAM of system BIOS
Resume error process
(Program halt when error)
Return CPU clock in low
Prohibition of all SMI
Resume status Clear
Return to ROM
Forwards the area of C0000h to
EFFFFh to PCI
2-24
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-4 Debug port error status (4/7)
D port status
Inspection items
SMRAM initialization
Details
F104h
WakeUp factor check
SMRAM base rewriting and storing CPU
state map for BIOS
Permission of SMI based on ASMI
F106h
Initialization of devices which need
initialization before PCI bus initialization.
PIT test (Only when Cold booting)
and initialization
Setting of test pattern to channel 0 of
PIT#0
Check whether the set test pattern can be
read
Initialization of PIT channel 0
Initialization of PIT channel 2
Test of PIT channel 1
Setting of timer interruption interval to
55ms
Setting of the sound generator
frequency to 664Hz
Check whether the refresh signal
works normally in 30 micro-s refresh
interval (Program halt when time out)
Test of PIT channel 2
(Check whether the speaker gate
works normally.)
CPU clock measurement
Permission of SMI except auto-off function
Battery discharging current control
Dividing procedures for time measuring by
IRT
Setting for clock generator
CPU Initialization
P6 microcode update
Set of permission/prohibition of
processor serial number ID
Geyserville support check
Setting of CPU clock “high"
Graphics Aperture Size setting
F107h
Saving memory configuration in each row
to buffer
Reading of EC version
Update of flash ROM type
Judging of destination (Japan or except
Japan) based on DMI data
CMOS default setting check
(Default set if Bad battery, Bad
checksum (ROM, CMOS) detected.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-4 Debug port error status (5/7)
D port status
Inspection items
ACPI table initialization
Details
(F107h)
(for execution of option ROM)
Initialization of devices which need
initialization before PCI bus initialization
Initialization of temperature control
information
Set to clock generator
PC multi-box status acquisition
HC initialization & Device recognition
VGA display off & Reset control
AC’97 control
KBC initialization
Sound initialization
PIC initialization
PIC test
Password Initialization
HDD initialization sequence start
PCI bus initialization
F108h
F109h
WakeUp factor check
Task generation for waiting INIT_PCI
completion
CMOS data initialization (2)
Setting power-off Enable
Clear of WakeUp factor
CPU speed control
Panel open/close control
Serial interrupt control
Serial interrupt control
Initialization of PC card slot
(Before serial interrupt)
PCI automatic configuration
Making of work for automatic
configuration
Configuration
Saving of VGA configuration result
F10Bh
Task generation for waiting
PCI_CONFIGURATION completion
Set of permission/prohibition of
IEEE1394
Initialization of H/W needed after PCI
configuration
Output code generation
2-26
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Table 2-4 Debug port error status (6/7)
D port status
Inspection items
FIRST_64KB_CHECK
Details
F10Ch
(Check of first 64KB memory)
(Initialization of vectors)
(Initialization of NDP)
F10Dh
F10Eh
F10Fh
INIT_INT_VECTOR
INIT_INDP
INIT_SYSTEM
(Initialization of system)
Storing of CMOS error information to
IRT_ERR_STS_BUF
Timer initialization start
Initialization of buffers for power saving
EC initialization & Reading of battery
information
Update of system BIOS (Update of model
name and EDID information for LCD)
F110h
INIT_DISPLAY
Waiting for completion of VGA chip
initialization, VGA BIOS initialization)
F111h
F112h
F113h
F114h
DISP_LOGO
(Logo display)
SYS_MEM_CHECK
EXT_MEM_CHECK
(Conventional memory check)
(Exception check in protected mode)
CHK_DMA_PAGE
CHECK _DMAC
INIT_DMAC
(DMA Page Register check)
(DMA check)
F117h
F118h
F119h
(DMA initialization)
BOOT_PASSWORD
(Password check)
(Waiting for completion of INIT_FDD
segmentation)
Waiting for completion of HDD initialization
Key input check while IRT
(Finish waiting for KBC initialization)
ATA priority initialization
(Option I/O ROM check)
F11Ch
F11Dh
EX_IO_ROM_CHECK
PRE_BOOT_SETUP
Saving of value in 40:00h (for SIO
saving/restoring)
Setting of font address for resume
password
Setting of repeat parameter for USB KB
Acquisition of keys pressed during IRT
Storing of T_SHADOW_RAM_SIZE
Update of system resource before boot
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Table 2-4 Debug port LED status (7/7)
D port status
Inspection items
Details
(F11Dh)
Rewriting of memory map data of INT15h E820h
function
Update DMI table
Copy of ACPI table to top of expansion memory
Waiting for writing of PSC version to BIOS
completion
Waiting for clock generator setting completion
(Stop D port = 1EH when error)
Cancel of NMI Mask
TIT check sum
Clear of the IRT flag of Runtime side
Update of check sum of Runtime side
Upgrade check for CPU, HDD
Prohibition of unused PC cards
HW initialization before Boot, Waiting for
initialization completion
Setting of battery save mode
Setting of date
Waiting for completion of AC-Link initialization
Update of DMI Wakeup factor, Update of SM-
BIOS structure table
PCI device configuration space close
Cache control
CPU process
Update of parameter block A
Specify CPU clock in SETUP
Waiting for HDD motor-off which id disabled
PRE_BOOT_SETUP process
Clear of PWRBTN_STS
Set Power Button to Enable
F11Fh
FFFFh
2-28
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
Procedure 3 Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the following tests from the Diagnostic Test Menu. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform these tests.
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
System test
Memory test
Keyboard test
Display test
Floppy Disk test
Printer test
Async test
Hard Disk test
Real Timer test
NDP test
Expansion test
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test
Only One test
Wireless LAN test
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
Sound test
If an error is detected during these tests, go to Procedure 4.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.4 System Board Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4
Replacement Check
The system board connectors may be disconnected. Disassemble the computer following the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform Check 1.
Check 1 Visually check for the following:
a) Cracked or broken connector housing
b) Damaged connector pins
If connectors are properly plugged, but there is still a problem, go to Check 2.
Check 2 The system board may be damaged. Replace the system board with a new one
following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-30
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
2
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
This section describes how to determine if the USB FDD is functioning properly. Perform the
steps below starting with Procedure 1 and continuing with the other procedures as required.
Procedure 1: FDD Head Cleaning Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
FDD Head Cleaning Check
FDD head cleaning is one option available in the Diagnostic Program.
After connecting USB FDD, insert the Diagnostics Disk in the floppy disk drive. Turn on the
computer and run the test. And then clean the FDD heads using the cleaning kit. If the FDD
still does not function properly after cleaning, go to Procedure 2.
Detailed operation is given in Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics.
If the test program cannot be executed on the computer, go to Procedure 3.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Insert the Diagnostics Disk in the USB FDD, turn on the computer and run the test. Refer to
Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about the diagnostics test procedures.
Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly and that the write protect tab is disabled.
Floppy disk drive test error codes and their status names are listed in Table 2-5. If any other
errors occur while executing the FDD diagnostics test, go to Check 1.
Table 2-5 FDD error code and status
Code
01h
02h
03h
04h
06h
08h
09h
10h
20h
40h
60h
80h
EEh
FFh
Status
Bad command
Address mark not found
Write protected
Record not found
Media replaced
DMA overrun error
DMA boundary error
CRC error
FDC error
Seek error
FDD not drive
Time out error (Not ready)
Write buffer error
Data compare error
Check 1 If the following message is displayed, disable the write protect tab on the floppy
disk by sliding the write protect tab to “write enable”. If any other message
appears, perform Check 2.
Write protected
Check 2 Make sure the floppy disk is formatted correctly. If it is, go to Procedure 3.
2-32
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.5 USB FDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The USB FDD is connected to the System Board via USB port.
Check 1 Make sure the USB cable of the FDD is securely connected to the USB port.
Check 1 Make sure USB FDD is firmly connected to USB port. If the connection is loose,
connect firmly and repeat Procedure 2. If the problem still occurs, go to Check 2.
NOTE: When checking the connection, be sure to check it with care for the followings.
1. Cable can not be disconnected from the connector.
2. Cable is connected straight to the connector.
3. Cable is connected all the way seated in the connector.
4. Cable can not be broken.
Check 2 USB FDD may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 3.
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in
Chapter 4 Replacement Procedures.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
To check if HDD is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures below as
instructed.
Procedure 1: Partition Check
Procedure 2: Message Check
Procedure 3: Format Check
Procedure 4: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 5: Connector Check and Replacement Check
CAUTION: The contents of the hard disk will be erased when the HDD troubleshooting
procedures are executed. Transfer the contents of the hard disk to floppy
disks or other storage drive(s). For the backup, refer to the User’s Manual.
Procedure 1
Partition Check
Insert the Toshiba MS-DOS system disk and start the computer. Perform the following
checks:
Check 1 Input C: and press Enter. If you cannot change to drive C, go to Check 2. If you
can change to drive C, go to Procedure 2.
Check 2 Input FDISK and press Enter. Choose Display Partition Information from the
FDISK menu. If drive C is listed in the Display Partition Information, go to Check
3. If drive C is not listed, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to
create a DOS partition or a logical DOS drive on drive C. If the problem still
occurs, go to Procedure 2.
Check 3 If drive C is listed as active in the FDISK menu, go to Check 4. If drive C is not
listed as active, return to the FDISK menu and choose the option to set the active
partition for drive C. Then go to Procedure 2.
Check 4 Remove the system disk from the FDD and reboot the computer. If the problem
still occurs, go to Procedure 2. Otherwise, the HDD is operating normally.
2-34
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Message Check
When the power is turned on, the system performs the Initial Reliability Test (IRT) installed
in the BIOS ROM. When the test detects an error, an error message is displayed on the
screen.
Make sure no floppy disk is in the FDD. Turn on the computer and check the message on the
screen. When an OS starts from the HDD, go to Procedure 3. Otherwise, start with Check 1
below and perform the other checks as instructed.
Check 1 If any of the following messages appear, go to Procedure 3. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 2.
HDC ERROR
or
HDD #X ERROR (After 5 seconds this message will disappear.)
Check 2 If either of the following messages appears, go to Check 3. If the following
messages do not appear, perform Check 4.
Insert system disk in drive
Press any key when ready .....
or
Non-System disk or disk error
Replace and press any key when ready
Check 3 Using the SYS command of the MS-DOS, transfer the system to the HDD. If the
system is not transferred, go to Procedure 3. Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for
detailed operation.
If the following message appears on the display, the system program has been
transferred to the HDD.
System Transferred
If an error message appears on the display, perform Check 4.
Check 4 Connection between HDD and the system board may be defective (Refer to the
steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures for disassembling.). Insert
HDD to the connector firmly. If it is (or they are) firmly connected, go to
Procedure 3.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Format Check
The computer’s HDD is formatted using the MS-DOS FORMAT program or the physical
format program of the test program. To format the HDD, start with Check 1 below and
perform the other steps as required.
Refer to the MS-DOS Manual for the operation of MS-DOS. For the format by the test
program, refer to the Chapter 3.
Check 1 Format an HDD using MS-DOS FORMAT command. Type as FORMAT
C:/S/U.
If HDD can not be formatted, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Using the MS-DOS FDISK command, set the HDD partition. If the partition is
not set, go to Check 3. If it is set, format HDD using MS-DOS FORMAT
command.
Check 3 Using the Diagnostic Disk, format HDD with a format option (physical format). If
HDD is formatted, set the HDD partition using MS-DOS FDISK command.
If you cannot format HDD using the Tests and Diagnostic program, go to
Procedure 4.
2-36
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
Procedure 4
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The HDD test program is stored in the Diagnostics Disk. Perform all of the HDD tests in the
Hard Disk Drive Test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information about
the HDD test program.
If an error is detected during the HDD test, an error code and status will be displayed. The
error codes and statuses are described in Table 2-6. If an error code is not displayed but the
problem still occurs, go to Procedure 5.
Table 2-6 Hard disk drive error code and status
Code
05
Status
HDD - HDC NOT RESET ERROR
HDD - DRIVE NOT INITIALIZE
HDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
HDD - BAD TRACK ERROR
HDD - UNDEFINED ERROR
HDD - OVERRUN ERROR (DRQ ON)
HDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
HDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
HDD - RECORD NOT FOUND ERROR
HDD - ECC ERROR
07
09
0B
BB
08
01
02
04
10
20
HDD - HDC ERROR
40
HDD - SEEK ERROR
80
HDD - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD - ECC RECOVER ENABLE
HDD - DRIVE NOT READY
HDD - WRITE FAULT
11
AA
CC
E0
0A
EE
DA
12
HDD - STATUS ERROR
HDD - BAD SECTOR
HDD - ACCESS TIME ERROR
HDD - NO HDD
HDD - DMA CRC ERROR
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.6 HDD Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 5
Connector Check and Replacement Check
HDD is connected to the system board via HDD FPC. The connection of HDD, HDD FPC or
system board may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty. Disassemble the computer
following instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and perform the following
checks.
Check 1 Make sure that HDD is firmly connected to HDD FPC and that HDD FPC is
firmly connected to system board.
If any of the connections are loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the
problem still occurs, go to Check 2.
Check 2 HDD FPC may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions in
Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and check the operation. If the problem still
occurs, perform Check 3.
Check 3 HDD may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions in
Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures and check the operation. If the problem still
occurs, perform Check 4.
Check 4 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-38
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.7 Keyboard Troubleshooting
2.7 Keyboard Troubleshooting
To check if the computer’s keyboard is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the Keyboard Test (DIAGNOSTIC TEST) and Pressed key display test (ONLY
ONE TEST) in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more
information on how to perform the test program.
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, keyboard is functioning
properly.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.7 Keyboard Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Connector and Replacement Check
The connection of cable and board may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure keyboard cable is firmly connected to system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the problem
still occurs, go to Check 2.
Check 2 Keyboard may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions in
Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 3.
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-40
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.8 Touch pad Troubleshooting
2.8 Touch pad Troubleshooting
To check if the computer’s touch pad is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the Touch pad test (ONLY ONE TEST) in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter
3, Tests and Diagnostics, for more information on how to perform the test program.
If an error occurs, go to Procedure 2. If an error does not occur, touch pad is functioning
properly.
Procedure 2
Connector and replacement Check
The connection of cable and system board may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the cable is firmly connected to system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and repeat Procedure 1. If the problem
still occurs, go to Check 2.
Check 2 Touch Pad or its cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 3.
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.9 Display Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.9 Display Troubleshooting
To check if the computer’s display is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: External Monitor Check
Procedure 2: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 3: Connector and Cable Check
Procedure 4: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
External Monitor Check
Connect an external monitor to the computer’s external monitor port, then boot the computer.
The computer automatically detects the external monitor.
If the external monitor works correctly, the internal LCD may be faulty. Go to Procedure 3.
If the external monitor appears to have the same problem as the internal monitor, system
board may be faulty. Go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
The Display Test program is stored in Diagnostics disk. This program checks the display
controller on system board. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the USB FDD, turn on the
computer and run the test. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and Diagnostics for details. If an error is
detected, go to Procedure 3.
2-42
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.9 Display Troubleshooting
Procedure 3
Connector and Cable Check
LCD module is directly connected to system board by an LCD/FL cable. Also LCD module
is connected to system board via FL inverter. The connections of FL inverter is consist of
LCD/FL cable and HV cable. And, fluorescent lamp is connected to FL inverter by HV
cable. THese cables may be disconnected from system board or FL inverter. Disassemble the
computer following the steps described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
If the connection is loose, reconnect firmly and restart the computer. If the problem still
occurs, go to Procedure 4.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.9 Display Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 4
Replacement Check
Fluorescent lamp, FL inverter, LCD module, HV cable and LCD/FL cable are connected to
display circuits. Any of these components may be faulty. Refer to Chapter 4, Replacement
Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then perform the
following checks:
•
•
If fluorescent lamp does not light, perform Check 1.
If characters or graphics on the internal display are not displayed clearly, perform
Check 4.
•
•
If some screen functions do not operate properly, perform Check 4.
If fluorescent lamp remains lit when the display is closed, perform Check 5.
Check 1 Replace fluorescent lamp with a new one following the instructions in Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures and test the display again. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 2.
Check 2 LCD/FL cable may be faulty. Replace FL/LCD cable with a new one following
the instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure and test the display again. If
the problem still occurs, perform Check 3.
Check 3 FL inverter may be faulty. Replace FL inverter with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure and test the display again. If the
problem still occurs, perform Check 4.
Check 4 LCD module may be faulty. Replace LCD module with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure and test the display again. If
the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.
Check 5 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedure.
2-44
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.10 Optical drive Troubleshooting
2.10 Optical drive Troubleshooting
To check if optical disk drive is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures
below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test in the Diagnostic Program. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests
and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.
Prepare the tools before the test.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The connection of optical drive and system board may be defective. Otherwise, they may be
faulty. Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4 and perform the
following checks:
Check 1 Make sure optical drive is firmly connected to the connector on system board.
If the connection is loose, reconnect it firmly and return to Procedure 2. If the
problem still occurs, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Optical drive may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in
Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 3.
Check 3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.11 Modem Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.11 Modem Troubleshooting
To check if modem is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures below as
instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute Modem test in the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test program. Refer to Chapter
3, Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.
If any error is detected, perform Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
MDC (Modem Daughter Card) is used as the modem for this computer. MDC is connected to
system board. If modem malfunctions, The connection of cable and connector, or module
may be defective. Otherwise, they may be faulty.
Disassemble the computer following the steps described in Chapter 4 and perform the
following checks:
Check 1 Make sure the following connections are firmly connected.
If any connector is disconnected, connect it firmly and return to Procedure 1. If
the problem still occurs, perform Check 2.
2-46
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.11 Modem Troubleshooting
Check 2 Modem cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still
occurs, perform Check 3.
Check 3 MDC may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in Chapter 4.
If the problem still occurs, perform Check 4.
Check 4 MDC harness may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.
Check 5 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instruction
in Chapter 4.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.12 LAN Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.12 LAN Troubleshooting
To check if the computer’s LAN is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check and Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute LAN test in the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test program. Refer to Chapter 3
Tests and Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Connector Check and Replacement Check
The LAN function is embedded on system board. If LAN malfunctions, its connection is
defective or LAN cable and system board may be faulty.
Check 1 Make sure LAN cable is firmly connected to LAN jack. If the problem still
occurs, perform Check 2.
Check 2 LAN cable may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 3.
Check 3 Make sure LAN harness is firmly connected to the connector CN4100. If the
problem still occurs, perform Check 4.
Check 4 LAN harness may be faulty. Replace it with a new one. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 5.
Check 5 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instruction
in Chapter 4.
2-48
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
To check if the computer's Wireless LAN is malfunctioning or not, follow the
troubleshooting procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Antennas' Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Transmitting-Receiving Check
Before starting the test, make sure the wireless communication switch is set in the ON
position.
Check 1 Execute Wireless LAN test program to check the transmitting-receiving function
of wireless LAN. You will need a second computer that can communicate by
wireless LAN. Perform the test following the instructions described in Chapter 3.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working. If the computer
does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 2
Antennas' Connection Check
The wireless LAN function-wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be defective. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure that the wireless communication switch is “On”.
If the switch is “Off”, turn it “On”. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure that wireless LAN card is firmly connected to the CN2200 (Mini-PCI)
on system board. If the connector is defective, connect it firmly and perform
Procedure 1. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 3.
Check 3 Make sure that wireless LAN antenna cables (black and white) are firmly
connected to the connectors on wireless LAN card. If wireless LAN antenna
cables are not connected properly, connect them firmly and perform Procedure 1.
If the problem still occurs, go to the procedure 3.
2-50
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.13 Wireless LAN Troubleshooting
Procedure 3 Replacement Check
Wireless LAN card, wireless LAN antenna or system board may be faulty. Refer to Chapter
4, Replacement Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then
perform the following checks:
Check 1 Wireless LAN antenna may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 2.
Check 2 Wireless LAN card may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 3.
Check3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.14 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.14 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
To check if the Bluetooth is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting procedures
below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Transmitting-Receiving Check
Procedure 2: Antennas' Connection Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Transmitting-Receiving Check
Before starting the test, make sure the wireless communication switch is set in the ON
position.
Check 1 Execute Bluetooth test program to check the transmitting-receiving function of
Bluetooth. You will need a second computer that can communicate by Bluetooth.
Perform the test following the instructions described in Chapter 3.
If the computer passes the test, the function is correctly working. If the computer
does not pass the test, perform Procedure 2.
2-52
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.14 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
Procedure 2
Antennas' Connection Check
The Bluetooth function-wiring diagram is shown below:
Any of the connections may be defective. Disassemble the computer following the steps
described in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures, and perform the following checks:
Check 1 Make sure that the wireless communication switch is “On”.
If the switch is “Off”, turn it “On”. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 2.
Check 2 Make sure that Bluetooth module is firmly connected to the CN4400 on system
board. If the connector is defective, connect it firmly and perform Procedure 1. If
the problem still occurs, perform Check 3.
Check 3 Make sure that Bluetooth antenna cables is firmly connected to the connectors on
Bluetooth module. If Bluetooth antenna cable is not connected properly, connect
them firmly and perform Procedure 1. If the problem still occurs, go to the
procedure 3.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.14 Bluetooth Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Replacement Check
Bluetooth module, Bluetooth antenna or system board may be faulty. Refer to Chapter 4,
Replacement Procedures, for instructions on how to disassemble the computer and then
perform the following checks:
Check 1 Bluetooth antenna may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 2.
Check 2 Bluetooth module may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the
instructions in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures. If the problem still occurs,
perform Check 3.
Check3 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4, Replacement Procedures.
2-54
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
2.15 Sound Troubleshooting
2.15 Sound Troubleshooting
To check if the sound function is malfunctioning or not, follow the troubleshooting
procedures below as instructed.
Procedure 1: Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Procedure 2: Connector Check
Procedure 3: Replacement Check
Procedure 1
Diagnostic Test Program Execution Check
Execute the Sound test in Sound Test program disk. Refer to Chapter 3, Tests and
Diagnostics for more information on how to perform the test program.
If any error is detected by the test, go to Procedure 2.
Procedure 2
Connector Check
The connection of sound system is shown in the following figure.
As the connection may be defective, disassemble the PC and check each connection.
If the problem still occurs, go to Procedure 3.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.15 Sound Troubleshooting
2 Troubleshooting Procedures
Procedure 3
Replacement Check
If external microphone does not work properly, perform check 1.
If headphone does not work properly, perform check 2.
•
•
•
•
If internal microphone does not work properly, perform check 3.
If speaker does not work properly, perform check 4.
Check 1 External microphone may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps
in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.
Check 2 Headphone may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in
Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.
Check 3 Internal microphone may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps
in Chapter 4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.
Check 4 Speaker may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the steps in Chapter
4. If the problem still occurs, perform Check 5.
Check 5 System board may be faulty. Replace it with a new one following the instructions
in Chapter 4.
2-56
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Tests and Diagnostics
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-ii
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Contents
3.1
The Diagnostic Test................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Diagnostics menu ................................................................................. 3-1
H/W(hardware) initial information setting tool ................................... 3-3
Heatrun test program............................................................................ 3-3
3.2
Executing the Diagnostic Test ................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
Diagnostics menu (T&D)..................................................................... 3-5
H/W initial information setting tool..................................................... 3-7
Heatrun test program............................................................................ 3-7
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Setting of the hardware configuration ....................................................................... 3-8
Heatrun Test............................................................................................................. 3-11
Subtest Names.......................................................................................................... 3-12
System Test.............................................................................................................. 3-14
Memory Test............................................................................................................ 3-16
Keyboard Test.......................................................................................................... 3-17
Display Test ............................................................................................................. 3-18
3.10 Floppy Disk Test...................................................................................................... 3-21
3.11 Printer Test............................................................................................................... 3-23
3.12 Async Test ............................................................................................................... 3-25
3.13 Hard Disk Test......................................................................................................... 3-26
3.14 Real Timer Test........................................................................................................ 3-29
3.15 NDP Test.................................................................................................................. 3-31
3.16 Expansion Test......................................................................................................... 3-32
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test ..................................................................................... 3-34
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names ........................................................................ 3-35
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status ................................................................................... 3-38
3.20 Only One Test.......................................................................................................... 3-40
3.20.1 Program Description .......................................................................... 3-40
3.20.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-40
3.21 Head Cleaning.......................................................................................................... 3-48
3.21.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-48
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.21.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-48
3.22 Log Utilities ............................................................................................................. 3-49
3.22.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-49
3.22.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-50
3.23 Running Test............................................................................................................ 3-51
3.23.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-51
3.23.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-51
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities...................................................................................... 3-52
3.24.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-52
3.24.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-53
3.25 System Configuration .............................................................................................. 3-57
3.25.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-57
3.25.2 Operations .......................................................................................... 3-58
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b)............................................................ 3-59
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)......................................................... 3-61
3.28 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)...................................................... 3-65
3.29 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)............................................................ 3-70
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program .................................................. 3-74
3.30.1 LAN test ............................................................................................. 3-74
3.30.2 Modem test......................................................................................... 3-77
3.30.3 Bluetooth test...................................................................................... 3-78
3.30.4 IEEE1394 test..................................................................................... 3-87
3.31 Sound Test Program................................................................................................. 3-88
3.31.1 Sound (Standard) test ......................................................................... 3-88
3.31.2 Sound (Legacy) test............................................................................ 3-90
3.31.3 CD Sound (Standard) test................................................................... 3-91
3.31.4 CD Sound (Legacy) test ..................................................................... 3-93
3.32 SETUP ..................................................................................................................... 3-94
3.32.1 Function Description.......................................................................... 3-94
3.32.2 Accessing the SETUP Program.......................................................... 3-96
3-iv
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
Figure 3-1
Name and positions of each side.................................................................. 3-45
Tables
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Table 3-5
Table 3-6
Table 3-7
Subtest names............................................................................................... 3-12
Error codes and error status names.............................................................. 3-35
Hard disk controller status register contents................................................ 3-38
Error register contents.................................................................................. 3-39
Error message............................................................................................... 3-80
Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR)................................................. 3-81
Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT).............................. 3-85
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-vi
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
3
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
This chapter explains how to use the Diagnostic Test programs to test the functions of the
computer’s hardware modules. The Diagnostics Programs are stored on some Diagnostic
Disks. There are Service Program Modules (DIAGNOSTIC MENU) and the Test Program
Modules (DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU) on the Diagnostic Disk.
The Hardware Initial information Setting Tool consists of some programs which write the
hardware information or displays the current information of the computer. It is also included
in one of Diagnostic Disks.
The heatrun test is automatic test program which executes the some tests successively.
NOTE: Before starting the diagnostics, be sure to follow these steps:
1. Check all cables are connected firmly.
2. Exit any application and close Windows.
3. Check if "ALL Device" is selected in the item [Device Config.] in SETUP
menu. After checking the diagnostics, be sure to select "Setup by OS".
3.1.1 Diagnostics menu
The DIAGNOSTIC MENU consists of the following functions.
‰ DIAGNOSTIC TEST
‰ ONLY ONE TEST
‰ HEAD CLEANING
‰ LOG UTILITIES
‰ RUNNING TEST
‰ FDD UTILITIES
‰ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
‰ EXIT TO MS-DOS
The DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU contains the following functional tests:
‰ SYSTEM TEST
‰ MEMORY TEST
‰ KEYBOARD TEST
‰ DISPLAY TEST
‰ FLOPPY DISK TEST
‰ PRINTER TEST
‰ ASYNC TEST
‰ HARD DISK TEST
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
‰ REAL TIMER TEST
‰ NDP TEST
‰ EXPANSION TEST
‰ CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
Other tests are:
‰ Wireless LAN TEST (Wireless LAN test disk)
‰ LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 TEST (LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test
disk)
‰ Sound TEST (Sound test disk)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the Diagnostic test programs.
‰ USB FDD
‰ The Diagnostic Disks
(T&D for maintenance, LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test disk for maintenance,
Wireless LAN test disk for maintenance and Sound test disk for maintenance)
‰ A formatted working disk (Floppy disk test)
‰ A cleaning kit to clean the floppy disk drive heads (Head Cleaning)
‰ An external CRT monitor supporting monitor ID (Expansion test)
‰ A CD test media TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK or ABEX TEST CD-ROM
(Sound test)
‰ A DVD test media (DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1) (Sound test)
‰ A music CD (Sound test)
‰ A CD-RW test media (CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test)
‰ A USB test module (USB test )
‰ A USB cable (USB test)
‰ LAN wraparound connector (LAN test)
‰ Module cable and RJ11 connector checker (Modem test)
‰ Headphones (Sound test)
‰ A microphone (Sound test)
‰ A PC for wraparound test (Wireless LAN test/Bluetooth test/IEEE1394 test)
‰ PC card wraparound connector (Expansion test)
‰ RS-232C wraparound connector (Async test)
3-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.1 The Diagnostic Test
3.1.2 H/W (Hardware) initial information setting tool
The H/W initial information setting tool consists of the following programs.
‰ Initial configuration
‰ Region write
‰ DMI information save
‰ DMI information recovery
‰ System configuration display
‰ E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
You will need the following equipment to perform some of the programs.
‰ The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
3.1.3 Heatrun test program
The heatrun test starts automatically after the selection.
You will need the following equipment to perform this program.
‰ The Diagnostics Disk (Main T&D)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
To start the DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM, follow these steps:
1. Insert the Diagnostics disk in the floppy disk drive.
2. Release the lock of the power switch and turn on the computer with pressing the F12.
Select the FDD in the display for selecting booting unit. Then, press Enter and the
following menu appears.
Microsoft Windows XX Startup Menu
---------------------------------------------------------
1. Repair Main (T&D)
2. Repair initial config set
3. Repair Heatrun (T&D)
Enter a choice: 1
To start the Diagnostics menu (T&D), press 1 and Enter .
To start the H/W initial information setting tool, press 2 and Enter.
To start the Heatrun test, press 3 and Enter.
NOTE: When replacing the system board, be sure to execute the following procedures.
(1)Before replacing the system board, execute subtest03 "DMI information save"
in 3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration in order to save the DMI information
from system board to floppy disk.
(2)After replacing the system board, execute the subtest04 "DMI information
recovery" and subtest08 "System configuration display" in 3.3 Setting of the
hardware configuration in order to copy the DMI information and system
information from the floppy disk.
3-4
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3.2.1 Diagnostics menu (T&D)
After pressing 1 and Enter in the startup menu, the following menu appears.
TOSHIBA personal computer Common DIAGNOSTICS
Version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTICS MENU :
1 - DIAGNOSTIC TEST
2 – ONLY ONE TEST
3 -
4 - HEAD CLEANING
5 - LOG UTILITIES
6 - RUNNING TEST
7 - FDD UTILITIES
8 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
9 - EXIT TO MS-DOS
NOTE: To exit the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press the Esc key. If a test program is in
progress, press Ctrl + Break to exit the test program. If a test program is in
progress, press Ctrl + C to stop the test program.
Set the highlight bar to 1, and press Enter. The following DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
will appear:
TOSHIBA personal computer Common DIAGNOSTICS
version X.XX (c) copyright TOSHIBA Corp. 20XX
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU :
1 - SYSTEM TEST
2 - MEMORY TEST
3 - KEYBOARD TEST
4 - DISPLAY TEST
5 - FLOPPY DISK TEST
6 - PRINTER TEST
7 – ASYNC TEST
[It is not supported]
8 - HARD DISK TEST
9 - REAL TIMER TEST
10 - NDP TEST
11 - EXPANSION TEST
12 - CD-ROM/DVD-ROM TEST
88 - ERROR RETRY COUNT SET [FDD & HDD]
99 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Functions 1 through 12 are the Diagnostic Tests. Function 88 sets the floppy disk
drive and hard disk drive error retry count (0-255).
To exit the submenu of the Diagnostic Test and returns to the Diagnostics Menu, set
the highlight bar to function 99 and press Enter.
Select the option you want to execute and press Enter. When you select 1- SYSTEM
TEST, the following message will appear:
SYSTEM TEST NAME XXXXXX xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
;key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ADDRESS
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
: XXXXXX STATUS
: XXX
SUB-TEST MENU :
01 - ROM checksum
02 – Fan ON/OFF
03 - Geyserville
04 - Quick charge
05 - DMI read
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
Select the desired subtest number from the subtest menu and press Enter. The following
message will appear:
TEST LOOP : YES (or NO)
ERROR STOP : YES (or NO)
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option.
Selecting YES of TEST LOOP increases the pass counter by one, each time the test cycle
ends and restarts the test cycle.
Selecting NO returns the process to the subtest menu after the test is complete.
3-6
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.2 Executing the Diagnostic Test
Use the up and down arrow keys to move the cursor to “ERROR STOP”.
Use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired option and press Enter.
Selecting YES of ERROR STOP stops the test program when an error is found and displays
the operation guide on the right side of the display screen as shown below:
ERROR STATUS NAME [[ HALT OPERATION ]]
1: Test end
2: Continue
3: Retry
These three selections have the following functions respectively:
1. Terminates the test program and exits to the subtest menu.
2. Continues the test.
3. Restarts the test from the error.
Selecting NO keeps the test running even if an error is found. When an error occurred, the
error status is displayed and one error is added to the error counter.
Table 3-1 in section 3.5 describes the function of each test on the subtest menu. Table 3-2 in
section 3.18 describes the error codes and error status for each error.
3.2.2 H/W initial information setting tool
After selecting this test, the following menu appears in the display.
###################################################################
######
H/W initial information setting tool VX.XX
######
###################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ………………………… Initial configuration
2 ………………………… Region write
3 ………………………… DMI information save
4 ………………………… DMI information recovery
8 ………………………… System configuration display
9 ………………………… E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*******************************************************************
... Press test number[1-4,8,9] ?
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.3.
3.2.3 Heatrun test program
Heatrun test starts executing the same subtest as 3.23 RUNNING TEST.
For more details on this test, refer to the section 3.4.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
To execute this program, select 2-Repair initial config testin the startup
menu, press Enter and follow the directions on the screen. The H/W initial information
setting tool consists of four subtests. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Initial configuration
This subtest executes the following items and shows their contents in the
display. When an item ends normally, the program proceeds automatically to
the next one. When an error is found, the program stops and waits for key
input. (After solving the problem, the program executes the item again.)
Setting of the CPU set table
Setting of the microcode
Setting of the EHSS
Inputting and writing of DMI information
When the DMI information is displayed, the following messages
appear in order. Input each information. (If you do not replace the
PCB, the DMI information should not be changed.)
1. “Enter Model Name ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s model
name and press Enter. (e.g. PORTEGE)
2. “Enter Version Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
version number and press Enter. (e.g. PC18070C313S)
3. “Enter Serial Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s serial
number and press Enter. (e.g. 12345678)
4. “Enter Model Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s sales
model number and press Enter. (e.g. PP200-AAAAA)
5. “Enter Bundle Number ?” is displayed. Input the computer’s
PCN/Bundle number and press Enter.
(e.g. PMSREQ3Q34H/S0123456789)
6. “Write data OK (Y/N) ?” is displayed. To write the DMI
information to the Flash ROM, press Y, and then Enter.
7. “Create DMIINFO TXT (Y/N) ?” is displayed. Press Y, then the
DMI information (text data) is written to the Floppy disk, etc.
3-8
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
Setting of the HWSC
Setting of the UUID
Display of the DMI information (including UUID)
Setting of DVD region code (Yes/No)
After completion of the above settings, H/W configuration & DMI
information are appeared in order. Check the contents and press Enter.
Following message appears in the display. Press any key, then return to the
H/W initial information setting tool menu.
+------------------------------------------------+
+ It switches off the power on automatically. +
+------------------------------------------------+
Press any key to continue...
Subtest 02
Region write
This subtest executes the setting of the region code for DVD drive based on
the destination of the machine.
When the region code is already written, test ends without setting.
The following message appears in the display after setting the region code.
Press any key to return to the H/W initial information setting tool menu.
***********************************
*******
It completed
*******
***********************************
*
*
Press any key to continue...
Subtest 03
DMI information save
NOTE: Before replacing the system board, be sure to execute this subtest and save the
DMI information to the floppy disk.
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after
replacing.
This subtest saves all the DMI data in a floppy disk.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 Setting of the hardware configuration
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 04
DMI information recovery
NOTE: 1. After replacing the system board, be sure to execute this subtest and copy the
DMI information to a new system board.
2. Since the data of UUID is updated every time when this subtest, DMI
information recovery, is done, the saved UUID data is not written
This is one of tools to copy the DMI information to a new PCB after
replacing.
This subtest writes all the DMI data in the floppy disk into the new PCB.
Subtest 08
System configuration display
This subtest displays the information of the system configuration.
Confirm the contents and press Enter.
For more details on the system configuration information, refer to 3.25
"System configuration".
Subtest 09
E2PROM test (MAC/GUID/DMI)
It checks whether the MAC address, GUID of IEEE1394 and DMI
information are written.
3-10
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.4 Heatrun Test
3.4 Heatrun Test
To execute this program, select 3-Repair heatrunin the startup menu, press Enter.
After selecting the test, the same subtests as 3.23 RUNNING TEST are executed
successively.
For more details on the procedure and test content, refer to RUNNING TEST.
When the heatrun test ends, following message appears in the display.
************************************************
HEATRUN TEST END
************************************************
Press any key to continue...
Press any key and return to the startup menu.
NOTE: The test result (Errorlog.txt) is stored in the floppy disk. The result is displayed in
the same way as 3.22 LOG UTILITIES. For more detail in the display, refer to
LOG UTILITIES.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5 Subtest Names
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.5 Subtest Names
Table 3-1 lists the subtest names for each test program in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU.
Table 3-1 Subtest names (1/2)
No.
Test Name
SYSTEM
Subtest No.
Subtest Name
ROM checksum
1
01
02
03
04
05
01
02
03
04
05
Fan ON/OFF
Geyserville
Quick charge
DMI read
Conventional memory
Protected Mode
Protected Mode (cache off)
Cache memory (on/off)
Stress
2
MEMORY
3
4
KEYBOARD
DISPLAY
Pressed key code display
01
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
VRAM read/write for VGA
Gradation for VGA
Gradation for LCD
Gradation & Mode test for VGA
All dot on/off for LCD
“H” pattern display
LCD Brightness
5
FLOPPY DISK
01
02
03
04
05
Sequential read
Sequential read/write
Random address/data
Write specified address
Read specified address
3-12
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.5 Subtest Names
Table 3-1 Subtest names (2/2)
No.
Test Name
PRINTER
Subtest No.
Subtest Name
6
01
02
03
01
02
03
Ripple pattern
[Not supported]
Function
Wrap around
FIR/SIR Point to point (send)
7
8
ASYNC
FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)
Wrap around (board)
HARD DISK
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Sequential read
Address uniqueness
Random address/data
Cross talk & peak shift
Partial Read
Write specified address
Read specified address
Sequential write
W-R-C specified address
9
REAL TIMER
01
02
03
Real time
Backup memory
Real time carry
10
11
NDP
01
NDP test
EXPANSION
01
03
PCMCIA wrap around [Not supported]
RGB monitor ID
13
CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM
01
02
03
04
Sequential read
Read specified address
Random address/data
RW 1point W/R/C
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6 System Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.6 System Test
To execute the System Test select 1 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to execute
and press Enter.
Subtest 01
ROM Checksum
This subtest executes a checksum test of the BIOS ROM (range: F0000h to
FFFFFh, 64KB) on the System Board.
Subtest 02
Fan ON/OFF
This subtest turns on/off the fan motor by force with Fan ON/OFF commands.
The following message will appear.
Fan number select (1;FAN#1(CPU), 2;FAN#2(GPU), 0; FAN#1)?
To check the CPU fan, press 1 and Enter.
To check the GPU fan, press 2 and Enter.
To check both CPU fan and GPU fan, press 0 and Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution 0000RPM start
Make sure the fan does not rotate, then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution Low speed Start
Make sure the fan rotates at low speed, then press Enter.
The following message will appear.
*** Test Fan Revolution High speed Start
Make sure the fan rotates at high speed, then press Enter.
After a while, the fan rotating will stop.
Geyserville
Subtest 03
If the CPU supports Gerserville (SpeedStep), this Subtest checks that the CPU
operating clock speed can be changed.
Subtest 04
Quick Charge
3-14
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.6 System Test
This subtest checks the status for the quick charge.
DMI read
Subtest 05
This subtest displays the information in the Flash-ROM in the following
format.
*** DMI Data Display Ver X.XX ***
Model Name
: XXXXXXXXXXX
Version Number : XXXXXXXXXXXX
Serial Number : XXXXXXXX
Model Number
UUID Number
: XXXXXX-XXXXX
: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Press [Enter] to EXIT
To exit this subtest and return to the SYSTEM test menu, press Enter.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.7 Memory Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.7 Memory Test
To execute the Memory Test, select 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Conventional memory
This subtest writes a constant data to conventional memory (0 to 640 KB),
then reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 02
Protected Mode
NOTE: The CONFIG.SYS file must be configured without expanded memory manager
programs such as EMM386.EXE, EMM386.SYS or QEMM386.SYS. Also, the
HIMEM.SYS must be deleted from the CONFIG.SYS file.
This subtest writes constant data and address data (from 1MB to maximum
MB), and reads the new data and compares the result with the original data.
Subtest 03
Subtest 04
Protected Mode (Cache off)
This subtest executes the same way as the subtest02 with the cache off.
Cache Memory
To test the cache memory, a pass-through write-read comparison of ‘5Ah’
data is run repeatedly to the test area (‘7000’:’Program’ size to ‘7000’:’7FFF’
(32 KB)) to check the hit-miss ratio (on/off status) for CPU cache memory.
One test takes 3 seconds.
Number of misses < Number of hits → OK
Number of misses ≥ Number of hits → Fail
Subtest 05
Stress
Data (from 1MB to the maximum MB) is written from the 16KB write buffer
to the 16KB read buffer and compared the data in the buffers. The read buffer
starts from 0001 and the comparison is continued with the following read
buffer addresses: 0001, 0003, 0005, 0007, 0009, 000b, 000d and 000f.
3-16
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.8 Keyboard Test
3.8 Keyboard Test
To execute the Keyboard Test, select 3 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Pressed key code display
When a key is pressed, the scan code, character code, and key top name are
displayed on the screen in the format shown below. The Ins Lock, Caps
Lock, Num Lock, Scroll Lock, Alt, Ctrl, Left Shift, and Right Shift
keys are displayed in reverse screen mode when pressed. The scan codes,
character codes, and key top names are shown in Appendix D.
KEYBOARD TEST IN PROGRESS 302000
Scan code
Character code =
Keytop
Ins Lock Caps Lock Num Lock
Alt Ctrl Left Shift Right Shift
PRESS [Enter] KEY
=
=
Scroll Lock
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.9 Display Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.9 Display Test
To execute the Display Test, select 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
VRAM read/write for VGA
This subtest writes the constant data (AAh and 55h) to the video RAM. The
data is read and compared to the original data.
Subtest 02
Gradation for VGA
This subtest displays four colors: red, green, blue and white from left to right
across the screen from black to maximum brightness. The display below
appears on the screen, when this subtest is executed.
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
Subtest 03
Gradation for LCD
This subtest displays bands of gradations for mixed colors, then for red, green,
and blue. Next, it displays eight solid colors full screen: red, semi-red, green,
semi-green, blue, semi-blue, white, and semi-white. Each color displays for
three seconds.
3-18
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.9 Display Test
Subtest 04
Gradation & Mode test for VGA
This subtest displays gradations for following modes. To change the mode,
press Enter.
[Mode 12]
[Mode 13]
[Mode 3]
[Mode 111 640*480 64K]
[Mode 112 640*480 16M]
[Mode 114 800*600 64K]
[Mode 115 800*600 16M]
[Mode 117 1024*768 64K]
[Mode 118 1024*768 16M]
The display below appears on the screen when this subtest is executed.
(Display example: Mode 12)
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter after
displaying the Mode 118.
Subtest 05
All dot on/off for LCD
This subtest displays an all-white screen then an all-black screen. The display
changes automatically every three seconds, then returns to the DISPLAY
TEST menu.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.9 Display Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 06
“H” Pattern Display
This subtest displays a full screen of “H” patterns.
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH
To exit this subtest and return to the DISPLAY TEST menu, press Enter.
NOTE: The last row may not be completely filled. This condition does not indicate on
error.
Subtest 07
LCD Brightness
The LCD brightness changes in the following order:
Super-Bright —> Bright —> Semi-Bright —> Bright —> Super-Bright
After displaying with Super-Bright of LCD brightness, return to the
DISPLAY TEST menu.
3-20
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
CAUTION: Before running the floppy disk test, prepare a formatted work disk. Remove
the Diagnostics Disk and insert the work disk into the FDD. The contents of
the floppy disk will be erased.
To execute the Floppy Disk Test, select 5 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press
Enter and follow the directions displayed on the screen. After selecting the Floppy Disk
Test from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, messages to execute the test drive number,
media type and test start truck will be displayed successively. Answer each question with an
appropriate response to execute the test.
1. The following message will appear. Select the media mode and start track to be tested,
then press Enter.
Test start track
(Enter:0/dd:00-79) ?
2. The Floppy Disk test contains five subtests that test the FDD.
The floppy disk test menu will appear after you select FDD test parameters.
FLOPPY DISK
XXXXXXX
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX STATUS
: XXX
SUB-TEST MENU :
01 - Sequential read
02 - Sequential read/write
03 - Random address/data
04 - Write specified address
05 - Read specified address
99 - Exit to DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.10 Floppy Disk Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The following
message will appear during the floppy disk test.
xxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
FLOPPY DISK IN PROGRESS XXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB-TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX STATUS
: XXX
When the subtest 04 or 05 is selected, the following messages will appear on the screen.
Select the test data (subtest 04 only), track number and head number you want to test.
Test data
Track No.
Head No.
?? (subtest 04 only)
??
?
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest performs a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) that continuously
reads all the tracks (track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk.
Subtest 02
Sequential read/write
This subtest continuously writes data pattern B5ADADh to all the tracks
(track: 0 to 39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared
to the original data.
Subtest 03
Random address/data
This subtest writes random data to random addresses on all tracks (track: 0 to
39/0 to 79) on a floppy disk. The data is then read and compared to the
original data.
Subtest 04
Subtest 05
Write specified address
This subtest writes the data specified by an operator to a specified track, head,
and address.
Read specified address
This subtest reads data from a track, head, and address specified by an
operator.
3-22
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.11 Printer Test
3.11 Printer Test
CAUTION: Printer Test is not supported for this model.
To execute the Printer Test, select 6 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen. The following messages will appear after selecting the
Printer Test from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Answer each of the questions with an
appropriate response to execute the test.
NOTE: An IBM compatible printer must be connected to the system to execute this test.
Also, printer port wraparound connector must be connected.
The following message will appear, after selecting the subtest 01 to 03 of the printer test:
channel#1 = XXXXh
channel#2 = XXXXh
channel#3 = XXXXh
Select the channel number (1-3) ?
The printer I/O port address is specified by the XXXXh number. The computer supports
three printer channels. Select the printer channel number, and press Enter to execute the
selected subtest.
Subtest 01
Ripple Pattern
This subtest prints characters for codes 20h through 7Eh line-by-line while
shifting one character to the left at the beginning of each new line.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.11 Printer Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 02
Function
This subtest is for IBM compatible printers, and tests the following functions:
Normal print
Double-width print
Compressed print
Emphasized print
Double-strike print
All characters print
This subtest prints the various print types shown below:
Subtest 03
Wraparound
NOTE: To execute this subtest, a printer wraparound connector must be connected to the
computer’s printer port.
This subtest checks the output and bi-directional modes of the data control
and status lines through the parallel port wraparound connector
(34M741986G01). (Both output and bi-directional modes are tested.)
3-24
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.12 Async Test
3.12 Async Test
To execute the Async Test, select 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions displayed on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want
to execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01 and 02 require the following data format:
Method:
Speed:
Data:
Asynchronous
38400BPS
8 bits and one parity bit (EVEN)
Data pattern: 20h to 7Eh
Subtest 01
FIR/SIR Point to point (send)
NOTE: To execute subtests 01 and 02, each computer must have access to the other
computer’s infrared port.
This subtest sends 20h through 7Eh data to the receive side, then receives the
sent data and compares it to the original data through the FIR/SIR port.
Subtest 02
Subtest 03
FIR/SIR Point to point (receive)
This subtest is used with subtest 01 described above. This subtest receives the
data from the send side, then sends the received data through the FIR/SIR
port.
Wraparound (on board)
NOTE: To execute this subtest, an RS-232C wraparound connector must be connected to
the RS-232C port.
This subtest checks the data send/receive function through the wraparound
connector.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13 Hard Disk Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.13 Hard Disk Test
To execute the Hard Disk Test, select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter,
and follow the directions on the screen.
CAUTION: When executing subtest02, 03, 04, 06, 08 and 09, the message [The hard disk
will be destroyed.] will be displayed. The contents of the hard disk will be
erased when these tests are executed. Before running the test, the customer
should transfer the contents of the hard disk to floppy disk or another hard
disk. If the customer has not or cannot perform the back-up, create back-up
disks as described below.
Check to see if the Microsoft Create System Disks Tools (MSCSD.EXE) still
exists in the System Tools Folder. (This tool can be used only once.) If it
exists, use it to back up the pre-installed software, then use the Backup
utility in the System Tools folder to back up the entire disk, including the
user’s files.
Refer to the operating system instructions.
1. Input the number of HDD test and press Enter.
2. This message is used to select the error dump operation when a data compare error is
detected. Select 1 or 2.
Data compare error dump (1:no, 2:yes)
3. This message is used to select whether or not the HDD status is displayed on the
screen. The HDC status is described in section 3.19. Select 1 or 2.
Detail status display (1:no, 2:yes)
3-26
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.13 Hard Disk Test
4. The Hard Disk Test message will appear after you respond to the Detail Status
prompt. Select the number of the subtest you want to execute and press Enter. The
following message will appear during each subtest.
XXX DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] : test end
HARD DISK TEST XXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
: key stop
SUB TEST
: XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT : XXXXX
READ DATA
STATUS
: XX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
: XXX
The first three digits of the ADDRESS indicate which cylinder is being tested, the
fourth digit indicates the head and the last two digits indicate the sector.
The first digit of the STATUS number indicates the drive being tested and the last
two digits indicate the error status code as explained in table 3-2 of the section 3.18.
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of all the tracks on the HDD starting at
track 0. When all the tracks on the HDD have been read, the test starts at the
maximum track and reads the tracks on the HDD sequentially back to track 0.
Subtest 02
Address uniqueness
This subtest writes unique address data to each sector of the HDD track-by-
track. The data written to each sector is then read and compared with the
original data. There are three ways the HDD can be read:
1. Forward sequential
2. Reverse sequential
3. Random
Subtest 03
Random address/data
This subtest writes random data in a random length to random addresses. This
data is then read and compared to the original data.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.13 Hard Disk Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 04
Cross talk & peak shift
This subtest writes eight types of worst pattern data (listed below) to a
cylinder, then reads the data while moving from cylinder to cylinder. (Test the
data interference in the neighbor track)
Worst pattern data
Cylinder
‘B5ADAD’
‘4A5252’
‘EB6DB6’
‘150449’
’63B63B’
‘9C49C4’
‘2DB6DB’
‘D25044’
0 cylinder
1 cylinder
2 cylinder
3 cylinder
4 cylinder
5 cylinder
6 cylinder
7 cylinder
Subtest 05
Partial Read
This subtest reads 1GB data which is in minimum, middle and maximum
address of the HDD area.
Subtest 06
Subtest 07
Write specified address
This subtest writes specified data to a specified cylinder and head on the
HDD.
Read specified address
This subtest reads data, which has been written to a specified cylinder and
head on the HDD.
Subtest 08
Subtest 09
Sequential write
This subtest writes specified 2-byte data to all of the cylinders on the HDD.
W-R-C specified address
This subtest writes data to a specified cylinder and head on the HDD, then
reads the data and compares it to the original data.
3-28
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.14 Real Timer Test
3
3.14 Real Timer Test
To execute the Real Timer Test, select 9 from the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU, press Enter
and follow the directions on the screen. Move the highlight bar to the subtest you want to
execute and press Enter.
Subtest 01
Real time
A new date and time can be input during this subtest. To execute the real time
subtest, follow these steps:
1. Select subtest 01 and the following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new date:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST
2. If the current date is not correct, input the correct date at the “Enter new
date” prompt and press Enter.
3. The date is updated and the following messages will appear:
Current date : XX-XX-XXXX
Current time : XX:XX:XX
Enter new time:
PRESS [ENTER] KEY TO EXIT TEST
4. If the current time is not correct, input the correct time in 24-hour format.
To enter ":", press Shift + ;. The time is updated.
To exit the test, press Enter.
Subtest 02
Backup memory
This subtest checks the following backup memories:
Writes 1-bit of “on” data (01h through 80h) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes 1-bit of “off” data (FEh through 7Fh) to address 0Eh through 7Fh
Writes the data pattern AAh and 55h to the address 0Eh to 7Fh
Then the subtest reads and compares this data with the original data.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.14 Real Timer Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 03
Real time carry
CAUTION: When this subtest is executed, the current date and time are erased.
This subtest checks the real time clock increments. Make sure the date and
time are displayed in the following format:
Current date : 12-31-1999
Current time : 23:59:58
The real time increments are automatically executed and the following is
displayed:
Current date : 01-01-2000
Current time : 00:00:00
PRESS [Enter] KEY TO EXIT TEST
To exit the test, press Enter.
3-30
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.15 NDP Test
3.15 NDP Test
To execute the NDP test, select 10 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press Enter and
follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01
NDP
This test checks the following functions of NDP:
‰ Control word
‰ Status word
‰ Bus
‰ Addition
‰ Multiplication
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.16 Expansion Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.16 Expansion Test
To execute the expansion test, select 11 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST MENU, press
Enter and follow the directions on the screen.
Subtest 01
PCMCIA wraparound
CAUTION: PCMCIA wraparound test is not supported for this model.
NOTE: To execute this subtest, the PC card wraparound connector is required.
This subtest checks the following signal line of the PC card slot:
‰ Address line
‰ REG#, CE#1, CE#2 line
‰ Data line
‰ Speaker line
‰ Wait line
‰ BSY#, BVD1 line
This subtest is executed in the following order:
Sub#
Address
Good
Bad
Contents
Address line
REG#, CE#1, CE#2
nn=A0, 90, 80, 00
01
00001
00001
nn
nn
xx
xx
02
00002
ww
rr
Data line
ww=write data, rr=read
data
03
04
05
00003
00004
00005
––
40,80
nn
––
xx
xx
Speaker line
Wait line (40<xx<80)
Other lines (BSY#, BVD1)
NN=21, 00
NOTE: When selecting the subtest number01, the following message will appear:
Test slot number select (1:slot0, 2:slot1, 0:slot0&1)?
3-32
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.16 Expansion Test
Subtest 02
RGB monitor ID
NOTE: To execute this subtest, an external monitor with monitor ID function is
required.
Connect the external monitor to the PC for the test of ID acquisition.
The judgment of acquisition is based on the panel data. In simultaneous
display mode or internal display mode, in which the panel data is acquired,
this subtest will fail. Therefore, make sure only the external display is selected
when executing this subtest.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.17 CD-ROM/DVD-ROM Test
To execute the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test, select 13 from the DIAGNOSTICS TEST
MENU, press Enter and follow the directions on the screen.
NOTE: For the subtest 01, 02 and 03, use the TOSHIBA CD-ROM TEST DISK TDY-01
or ABEX TEST CD-ROM TCDR-702 and DVD-ROM TEST DISK TSD-1. For the
subtest 04, use a CD-RW media on the market.
Subtest 01
Sequential read
This subtest is a sequential reading of one-block units (2K bytes) of all the
logical addresses.
Subtest 02
Subtest 03
Read specified address
This subtest reads one-block data from a specified address.
Random address/data
This subtest reads one-block data and multi-block data from random addresses
200 times.
Subtest 04
RW 1point W/R/C
This subtest writes, reads and compares data at one point on a CD-RW media.
3-34
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
Table 3-2 lists the error codes and error status names for the Diagnostic Test.
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (1/3)
Device name
(Common)
Error code
Error status name
Data Compare Error
FF
ROM - CHECKSUM ERROR
System
01
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
ROM - SERIAL ID WRITE ERROR
ROM - NOT SUPPORTED PS-SYSTEM
ROM - SENSING ERROR(AC-ADAPT)
ROM - SENSING ERROR(1st Batt)
ROM - SENSING ERROR(2nd Batt)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(1)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(2)
ROM - THORMISTOR ERROR(3)
Memory
01
02
DD
RAM - PARITY ERROR
RAM - PROTECTED MODE NO CHANGE'
RAM - CACHE MEMORY ERROR
Keyboard
FE
FD
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
FA
EF
ED
USB - GET DESCR.ERROR (FIRST)
USB - SET ADDRESS ERROR
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR(Top 8B)
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR (Whole)
HUB - SET CONFIGURATION ERROR
HUB - GET DESCR.ERROR(DESCR.)
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(P ON)
HUB - GET STATUS ERROR
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(RESET)
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE ERROR
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE1 ERROR
HUB - SET FEATURE ERROR(Enab.)
HUB - CLEAR FEATURE2 ERROR
USB - OVER CURRENT ERROR
USB - GET DESCR.ERROR(SECOND)'
Display
EE
VRAM SIZE NOT SUPPORT
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (2/3)
Device name
FDD
Error code
Error status name
01
02
03
04
08
09
10
20
40
80
60
06
EE
FDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
FDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
FDD - WRITE PROTECTED
FDD - RECORD NOT FOUND
FDD - DMA OVERRUN ERROR
FDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
FDD - CRC ERROR
FDD - FDC ERROR
FDD - SEEK ERROR
FDD - TIME OUT ERROR
FDD - NOT DRIVE ERROR
FDD - MEDIA REMOVED
FDD - WRITE BUFFER ERROR
Printer
01
08
10
20
40
80
PRT - TIME OUT
PRT – FAULT
PRT - SELECT LINE
PRT - OUT OF PAPER
PRT - POWER OFF
PRT - BUSY LINE
ASYNC
01
02
04
08
10
20
40
80
88
05
06
RS232C - [DTR ON] TIME OUT
RS232C - [CTS ON] TIME OUT
RS232C - [RX READY] TIME OUT
RS232C - [TX FULL] TIME OUT
RS232C - PARITY ERROR
RS232C - FRAMING ERROR
RS232C - OVERRUN ERROR
RS232C - LINE STATUS ERROR
RS232C - MODEM STATUS ERROR
SIR - TIME OUT ERROR
FIR - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD
05
07
09
0B
BB
08
01
02
04
10
20
40
80
11
AA
HDD - HDC NOT RESET ERROR
HDD - DRIVE NOT INITIALIZE
HDD - DMA BOUNDARY ERROR
HDD - BAD TRACK ERROR
HDD - UNDEFINED ERROR
HDD - OVERRUN ERROR (DRQ ON)
HDD - BAD COMMAND ERROR
HDD - ADDRESS MARK NOT FOUND
HDD - RECORD NOT FOUND ERROR
HDD - ECC ERROR
HDD - HDC ERROR
HDD - SEEK ERROR
HDD - TIME OUT ERROR
HDD - ECC RECOVER ENABLE
HDD - DRIVE NOT READY
3-36
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.18 Error Code and Error Status Names
Table 3-2 Error codes and error status names (3/3)
Device name
(HDD)
Error code
Error status name
CC
E0
0A
EE
DA
12
HDD - WRITE FAULT
HDD - STATUS ERROR
HDD - BAD SECTOR
HDD - ACCESS TIME ERROR
HDD - NO HDD
HDD - DMA CRC ERROR
NDP
01
02
03
04
05
06
NDP - NO CO-PROCESSOR
NDP - CONTROL WORD ERROR
NDP - STATUS WORD ERROR
NDP - BUS ERROR
NDP - ADDITION ERROR
NDP - MULTIPLAY ERROR
EXPANSION
C1
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
CB
CC
CE
CF
ADDRESS LINE ERROR
CE#1 LINE ERROR
CE#2 LINE ERROR
DATA LINE ERROR
WAIT LINE ERROR
BSY# LINE ERROR
BVD1 LINE ERROR
ZV-Port ERROR
NO PCMCIA
CARD TYPE ERROR
ZV_CONT# ERROR
CD-ROM
/DVD-ROM
01
02
03
04
05
06
09
11
20
40
80
90
B0
BAD COMMAND
ILLEGAL LENGTH
UNIT ATTENTION
MEDIA CHANGE REQUEST
MEDIA DETECTED
ADDITIMAL SENSE
BOUNDARY ERROR
CORRECTED DATA ERROR
DRIVE NOT READY
SEEK ERROR
TIME OUT
RESET ERROR
ADDRESS ERROR
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
When an error occurs in the hard disk test, the following message is displayed:
HDC status = XXXXXXXX
Detailed information about the hard disk test error is displayed on the screen by an eight-
digit number. The first four digits represent the hard disk controller (HDC) error status
number and the last four digits are not used.
The hard disk controller error status is composed of two bytes; the first byte displays the
contents of the HDC status register in hexadecimal form and the second byte displays the
HDC error register.
The contents of the HDC status register and error register are listed in Tables 3-3 and 3-4.
Table 3-3 Hard disk controller status register contents
Bit
Name
Description
7
BSY
(Busy)
“0” … HDC is ready.
“1” … HDC is busy.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DRY
(Drive ready)
“0” … Hard disk drive is not ready to accept any command.
“1” … Hard disk drive is ready.
DWF
(Drive write fault)
“0” … DWF error is not detected.
“1” … Write fault condition occurred.
DSC
“0” … The hard disk drive heads are not settled over a track.
“1” … The hard disk drive heads are settled over a track.
(Drive seek complete)
DRQ
(Data request)
“0” … Drive is not ready for data transfer.
“1” … Drive is ready for data transfer.
COR
(Corrected data)
“0” … Not used
“1” … Correctable data error is corrected.
IDX
(Index)
“0” … Not used
“1” … Index is sensed.
ERR
“0” … Normal
(Error)
“1” … The previous command was terminated with an error.
3-38
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.19 Hard Disk Test Detail Status
Table 3-4 Error register contents
Bit
Name
Description
7
BBK
“0” … Not used
(Bad block mark)
“1” … A bad block mark is detected.
6
UNC
“0” … There is no uncorrectable data error.
(Uncorrectable)
“1” … Uncorrectable data error has been detected.
5
4
——
Not used
IDN
“0” … Not used
(Identification)
“1” … There is no ID field in the requested sector.
3
2
——
Not used
ABT
“0” … Not used
(Abort)
“1” … Illegal command error or command abort.
1
TK0
(Track 0)
“0” … The hard disk found track 0 during a recalibrate
command.
“1” … The hard disk could not find track 0 during a
recalibrate command.
0
——
Not used
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 Only One Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 Only One Test
3.20.1 Program Description
This program tests the unique functions of this model.
3.20.2 Operations
Select test 2 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. The following menu appears
in the display.
#################################################################
########
Only One Test Menu (XXXXXXXXX)
#######
#################################################################
*
*
* 1 ............ Pressed Key Display
* 2 ............ Touch Pad
* 3 ............ Kill Switch
* 4 ............ USB
* 5 ............ LED
* 6 ............ Acceleration sensor
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 9 ............ Common Test
*
*****************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-6, 9] ?
Input the subtest number you want to test and press Enter.
To return to the DIAGNOSTIC TEST menu, select 9 and press Enter.
3-40
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 Only One Test
Subtest 01
Pressed key display
When you execute this subtest, the keyboard layout is drawn on the display as
shown below. When any key is pressed, the corresponding key on the screen
changes to the key character that was pressed. Holding a key down enables
the auto-repeat function which causes the key’s display character to blink.
Press Del + Enter to end the test.
IF TEST OK, Press [Dell][Enter]key
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 Only One Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest 02
Touch Pad
This subtest checks the functions of the touch pad as shown below.
A) Direction and parameter
B) Switching function check.
This test displays the response from the touch pad and touch pad switch.
When moving your finger on the touch pad towards the upper left, the
<POINTING> display changes according to the following illustration. If a
touch pad switch is pressed, the <BUTTONS> displays appear on the right
side one by one. The parameters appear above the <BUTTONS> (1) or (2)
corresponding to the pressed touch pad switch highlights. To end this subtest,
press two touch pad switches at the same time.
3-42
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 Only One Test
Subtest 03
Kill Switch
This subtest checks if the Wireless communication switch works properly.
If the test is started with the switch ON, the following message appears in the
display.
Kill switch is set to a start position (OFF)
Slide the switch to OFF position. Then, the following message appears in the
display.
KILL SWITCH ON !!
Slide the switch to ON position. Then, the following message appears in the
display.
KILL SWITCH OFF !!
After Sliding the switch to OFF position, the screen returns to the Only One
Test menu automatically.
Subtest 04
USB
NOTE: When executing this subtest, USB test module and USB cable must be
connected.
This subtest checks if USB ports work properly.
The following menu appears in the display.
#################################################################
########
USB Port Select (XXXXXXXXX)
#######
#################################################################
*
*
* 0 ............ Port 0 (Upper right)
*
*
*
*
*
*
* 1 ............ Port 1 (Lower right)
* 2 ............ Port 2 (Left)
*
* 9 ............ EXIT to Only One Menu
*
*****************************************************************
.... Press test number[0-2, 9] ?
Connect the USB test module and USB cable to the computer.
Input the test port number and press Enter.
OKmessage appears in the display if the test ends without an error.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 Only One Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
NGmessage appears in the display if an error is found during the test. Confirm
the connection of cable, and then execute the test again.
Press 9 and Enter to return to Only One Test menu.
LED
Subtest 05
This subtest checks if each LED lights properly.
The following message appears in the display in order. Follow the instructions
in the display to execute the test.
[HDD Access LED test]
Confirm the LED of HDD status blinks properly.
Press any key and following message appears in the display.
[Caps/Num/Overlay BT/W-LAN LED test]
(1) Press [Caps Lock ] key ! ...Caps
(2) Press [Fn + F10 ] key ! ...Arrow
(3) Press [Fn + F11 ] key ! ...Num
(4) Slide [BT/W-LAN switch L&R]!
(on/off)
(on/off)
(on/off)
(on/off)
Confirm corresponding LED lights properly.
Press Enter and following message appears in the display.
Check [DC-IN]&[Power]&[Main Battery]LED= Green/Orange
Check if the each LED lights in the same color shown in the display (Message
switches Green <-> Orange).
Press Enter to return to the Only One Test menu.
3-44
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 Only One Test
Subtest 06
Acceleration sensor
This subtest detects and corrects the each axis (X, Y, Z).
NOTE: Make sure that this subtest is executed on the following condition:
1. Flat desk with vertical plane to get the stability of machine.
2. Prevent the machine from shake or shock.
<Example>
Set the machine
against the vertical plane
Vertical plane
with the Front upward
Flat desk
The figure below shows the name and position of each side.
Top
(heaven surface)
Back
Right side
(right)
Front
Left side
(left)
Figure 3-1 Name and positions of each side
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.20 Only One Test
3 Tests and Diagnostics
When this subtest is selected, the following message appears in the display.
The heaven surface establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
NOTE: Be sure to execute the test with the display panel opened.
Set the machine on the flat desk. Then press Enter to detect the data on this
setting of machine. The following message appears in the display.
The back establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the back of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The right establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the right side
of machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The front establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the front of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine. The following message appears in the display.
The left establishes in the upper direction
Press [Enter] key
Set the machine against the vertical plane on the flat desk with the left side of
machine upward. Then press Enter to detect the data on this setting of
machine.
When there is no defective during the all checks above, the following message
appears in the display. Then press Enter and return to the Only One Test
menu.
** Setting OK! **
Press [Enter] key
3-46
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.20 Only One Test
When a defective is found during the each check above, the following
message appears in the display. The test is halted at the point when the
defective is found.
** Setting ERROR! **
Press [Enter] key
Press Enter and return to the Only One Test menu. Then execute the test
again.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.21 Head Cleaning
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.21 Head Cleaning
3.21.1 Function Description
This function cleans the heads in the FDD by executing a series of head load/seek and read
operations. A cleaning kit is necessary to perform this program.
3.21.2 Operations
1. Selecting test 4 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the
following messages:
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK HEAD CLEANING : VX.XX
Mount cleaning disk(s) on drive(s).
Press any key when ready.
2. Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, then insert the cleaning disk and press
Enter.
3. When the “cleaning start”message appears, the FDD head cleaning has begun.
4. The display automatically returns to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU when the program is
completed.
3-48
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.22 Log Utilities
3.22 Log Utilities
3.22.1 Function Description
This function logs error information generated while a test is in progress and stores the
results in RAM. This function can store data on a floppy disk, or output the data to a printer
or the display.
The error information is displayed in the following order:
1. Error count (CNT)
2. Test name, Subtest number (TS-No)
3. Pass count (PASS)
4. Error status (STS)
5. FDD/HDD or memory address (ADDR)
6. Write data (WD)
7. Read data (RD)
8. HDC status (HSTS)
9. Error status name (ERROR STATUS NAME)
If the power switch is turned off, the error information will be lost.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.22 Log Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.22.2 Operations
1. Select 5 and press Enter in the DIAGNOSTIC MENU, the error information is
displayed in the following format:
XXXXX ERRORS
CNT TS-NO PASS STS ADDR WDRDHSTS [ERROR STATUS NAME]
001 FDD 02 0000 103 00001 00000000 FDD-WRITE PROTECTED
001 FDD 01 0000 180 00001 00000000 FDD-TIME OUT ERROR
Address
Error status
HDC status
Pass count
Read data
Subtest number
Error status name
Write data
Test name
Error count
[[1:Next,2:Prev,3:Exit,4:Clear,5:Print,6:FD Log Read,7:FD Log Write]]
2. The error information displayed on the screen can be manipulated by the following
number keys:
The 1 key scrolls the display to the next page.
The 2 key scrolls the display to the previous page.
The 3 key returns to the Diagnostic Menu.
The 4 key erases all error log information in RAM.
The 5 key outputs the error log information to a printer.
The 6 key reads the log information from a floppy disk.
The 7 key writes the log information to a floppy disk.
3. In the case of “error retry OK,” a capital “R” will be placed at the beginning of the
error status. However, it is not added to the error count.
3-50
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.23 Running Test
3.23 Running Test
3.23.1 Function Description
This function automatically executes the following tests in sequence:
1. System test (subtest 01)
2. Memory test (subtests 01, 02, 06)
3. Display test (subtest 01)
4. Real timer test (subtest 02)
5. HDD test (subtests 01)
The system automatically detects the number of floppy disk drives connected to the computer
for the FDD test.
3.23.2 Operations
1. Select 6 from the Diagnostic Menu and press Enter, the following messages for
selectable tests will appear in the display in order.
FDD write/read test (Y/N)?
Printer wrap around test (Y/N)?
Serial wrap around test (Y/N)?
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM test (Y/N)?
2. To execute the test, press Y and Enter. To cancel the test, press N and Enter. If you
select the selectable tests, follow the instruction message in the display.
3. After selecting the selectable tests, the running test starts automatically. To terminate
the program, press Ctrl + Break.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3.24.1 Function Description
This function formats the FDD, copies the floppy disk and displays the dump list for both the
FDD and HDD.
1. FORMAT
NOTE: This program is only for testing a floppy disk drive. It is different from the
Toshiba MS-DOS FORMAT command.
This program can format a floppy disk in the following formats:
(a) 2DD: Double-sided, double-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode,
512 bytes, 9 sectors/track.
(b) 2HD: Double-sided, high-density, double-track, 96/135 TPI, MFM mode, 512
bytes, 18 sectors/track.
2. COPY
This program copies data from a source floppy disk to a target floppy disk.
3. DUMP
This program displays the contents of the floppy disk and the designated sectors of
the hard disk on the display.
4. HDD ID READ
This program reads the hard disk ID and displays hard disk model number.
3-52
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3.24.2 Operations
1. Selecting 7 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and pressing Enter displays the
following message:
[ FDD UTILITIES ]
1 - FORMAT
2 - COPY
3 - DUMP
4 – HDD-ID READ
9 - EXIT TO DIAGNOSTICS MENU
2. FORMAT program
(a) Selecting FORMAT displays the following message:
DIAGNOSTICS - FLOPPY DISK FORMAT : VX.XX
Drive number select (1:A, 2:B) ?
(b) Select a drive number to display the following message:
Type select (0:2DD, 3:2HD) ?
(c) Select a media/drive type number and press Enter. A message similar to the
one below will be displayed:
Warning : Disk data will be destroyed.
Insert work disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(d) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the work disk and press
any key.
The following message will be displayed when the FDD format is executed:
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK = XXX
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD = X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Format start
[[track, head = XXX X]]
After the floppy disk is formatted, the following message will appear:
Format complete
Another format (1:Yes/2:No) ?
(e) Typing 1 displays the message from step (c) above. Typing 2 returns the test
to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3. COPY program
(a) When COPY is selected, the following message appears:
FLOPPY DISK FORMAT & COPY : VX.XX
Type select (0:2DD,3:2HD) ?
(b) Selecting a media/drive type number will display a message similar to the one
below:
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(c) Remove the Diagnostics Disk from the FDD, insert the source disk and press
any key. The following message will appear, indicating the program has
started.
[ FDD TYPE ] : TRACK
[ FDD TYPE ] : HEAD
= XXX
= X
[ FDD TYPE ] : SECTOR = XX
Copy start
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]
(d) The following message will appear.
Insert target disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(e) Remove the source disk from the FDD, then insert a formatted work disk and
press any key. The following message will appear and start copying to the
target disk.
[[ track,head = XXX X ]]
(f) When the amount of data is too large to be copied in one operation, the
message from step (b) is displayed again. After the floppy disk has been
copied, the following message will appear:
Copy complete
Another copy (1:Yes/2:No) ?
(g) To copy another disk, type 1 and the message from step (a) is displayed again.
Entering 2 returns the test program to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
3-54
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
4. DUMP program
(a) When DUMP is selected, the following message appears:
DIAGNOSTICS-HARD DISK & FLOPPY DISK DUMP : VX.XX
Drive type select (1:FDD, 2:HDD) ?
(b) Select a drive type. If 2:HDDis selected, the display will go to step (h). If
1:FDDis selected, the following message will appear:
Select drive number (1:A, 2:B) ?
(c) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
Format type select (1:2DD, 3:2HD) ?
(d) If 3:2HDis selected, the following message will appear. Select a media mode.
2HD media mode (1:1.20MB, 2:1.44MB, 3:1.23MB)?
(e) The following message will appear:
Insert source disk into drive A:
Press any key when ready.
(f) Insert a source disk and press any key and the following message will appear:
—— Max. address ——
[Track ] = XXXX
[Head ] = XX
[Sector] = XX
Track number ????
(g) Set the track number, head number and sector number you want to dump. The
system will access the disk and dump a list. Then the message shown in (k)
will appear.
(h) The following message will appear when selecting 2:HDDin (a).
Select drive number (1:C, 2:D) ?
(i) Select a drive number and the following message will be displayed.
---Max. address ---
[LBA ] = XXXXXXXXX
LBA number ????????
(j) Set the LBA number you want to dump. The system will access the disk and
dump a list.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.24 Floppy Disk Drive Utilities
3 Tests and Diagnostics
(k) The following message will appear. To finish the dump, select 3.
Press number key (1:up,2:down,3:end) ?
(l) The following message will appear. Selecting 2 returns to the FDD
UTILITIES MENU.
Another dump (1:Yes,2:No) ?
5. HDD ID READ program
Selecting HDD ID displays the following HDD ID configuration:
[HDD ID Read (VX.XX)] [Drive #1] [Drive #2]
Model No.
= XXXXXXX
= YYYYYYY
Press Enter to return to the FDD UTILITIES MENU.
3-56
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.25 System Configuration
3
3.25 System Configuration
3.25.1 Function Description
The System Configuration program contains the following configuration information for the
computer:
1. Processor Type [Code/L2 cache]
2. Chip set [VRAM]
3. BIOS ROM version [1st ID, 2nd ID]
4. Boot ROM version
5. EC/KBC version
6. PS Microprocessor version
7. SVP parameter version [Panel/Manufacture code/Product code]
8. Microcode revision [Processor number]
9. Total Memory Size [Conventional memory]
10. Battery code
11. HWSC
12. FSB [Voltage]
13. The number of printer ports
14. The number of ASYNC ports
15. Math co-processors
16. Floppy Disk Drive [Track/Head/Sector]
17. Hard Disk Drive [Sector/Drive size/Manufacture code]
18. Optical Disk Drive [Maker/Drive type/Manufacture code/Product code]
19. T&D total version
20. Date/Time
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.25 System Configuration
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.25.2 Operations
Select 8 from the DIAGNOSTIC MENU and press Enter. Then, the following system
configuration appears in the display.
System Configuration Display : Ver X.XX [Machine Name ???]
* - Processor Type
* - Chip set
* - BIOS ROM Version
* - BOOT ROM Version
* - EC/KBC Version
* - PS Micom Version
* - SVP Par. Version
* - Microcode Revision = VX.XX
* - Total Memory Size = XXXXXXMB (Conventional Memory = XXXKB)
* - Battery Code
* - HWSC
* - FSB
= XXXXXX-XXXXXMHz
= XXXXXX
Code = XX
L2 Cache = XXXXXKB
VRAM = XXXXXXMB
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
= VX.XX
1st ID = XXH, 2nd ID = XXH
(Panel=XXXXXXXXX, Manu=XXXX, Prod=XXXX)
(Processor=XXXh)
= XXXXXXXXXXXX
= XXXXXXX
= XXXXXMHz (Voltage = XEh)
LPT1 = XXXX LPT2 = XXXX LPT3 = XXXX
COM1 = XXXX COM2 = XXXX COM3 = XXXX
* - X Printer Adapter
* - X ASYNC Adapter
* - X Math CO-Processor
* - X Floppy Disk Drive(s) Track = XX Head = XX, Sector = XX
* - X Hard Disk Drive(s) #1 Sectors = XXXXXXXXXX (XXXGB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
#2 Sectors = XXXXXXXXXX (XXXGB) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]
* - ODD Drive
= XXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX [XXXXXXXXXXXX]
* - T&D Total Version = VX.XX
Press [Enter] Key
[Date = XXXX-YY-ZZ, XX:YY:ZZ]
Press Enter to return to the DIAGNOSTIC MENU.
3-58
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b)
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Intel-
made Calexico 802.11b). To execute the wireless LAN test, use the Diagnostics disk for
wireless LAN test. Finish the tests of the Main test program by selecting 99 - EXIT TO
DIAGNOSTICS MENU in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Then in the DIAGNOSTICS
MENU, select 9 - EXIT TO MS-DOS.
Insert the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test into the Floppy Disk Drive. Turn on the
power while pressing U.
NOTE: Use another computer (with Calexico wireless LAN card) that can communicate
by the wireless LAN as a reference machine to perform this test. An access point
is also required (Access point for 802.11b).
In this test, the following items are tested.
(1) MAC address Check
(2) Communication test
(Connection & Communication test for MAIN and AUX antenna)
To start the Wireless LAN test program, follow the steps below:
NOTE: Before starting the wireless LAN test, make sure the Wireless Communication
Switch is turned on. Release the write-protection of the floppy disk for the test.
Setting the responder machine
Connect the responder machine to the access point with a cross cable and turn on the access
point.
Insert the floppy disk containing the wireless LAN test program into the USB FDD of the
responder machine and turn on the responder machine. Then wait until the message appears.
Setting the target machine
Insert the floppy disk containing the wireless LAN test program into the USB FDD of the
target machine and turn on the target machine. Then the test starts automatically.
OK message appears in the display if the test ends without a defect. Then, press any key to
finish the test.
If an error is detected during the MAC address check, NG message appears in the display.
After pressing any key, following message appears in the display and finish the test.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.26 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
**************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
Mac Address Check : NG !!
**************************************************************
When a defective is detected during the MAC address check, following typical cause is
considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the test again.
If an error is detected during the connection & communication test for MAIN/AUX, NG
message appears in the display. After pressing any key, following message appears in the
display and finishes the test.
**************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
Main Antenna Test : NG !!
**************************************************************
When a defective is detected during the connection & communication test for MAIN/AUX,
following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main/Aux)
• Condition of wireless LAN communication (Interference/obstruction)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection and condition, execute the test again.
3-60
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Intel-
made Calexico 802.11b/g). To execute the wireless LAN test, use the Diagnostics disk for
wireless LAN test. Finish the tests of the Main test program by selecting 99 - EXIT TO
DIAGNOSTICS MENU in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Then in the DIAGNOSTICS
MENU, select 9 - EXIT TO MS-DOS.
Insert the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test into the Floppy Disk Drive. Turn on the
power while pressing U.
The following menu appears in the display.
******Intel Calexico 11b/g Card Maintenance test Menu******
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 : SKU check of Module
2 : MAC Address Check
3 : Antenna Check & communication test of 11b mode *
*
4 : Communication test of 11g mode
*
*
*
*
*
5 : All the tests of Calexico 11g Card
(SKU & MAC Check, 11b/g communication test)
***********************************************************
SELECT TEST No, (1-5) :
To execute the subtest, input the subtest number and press Enter.
Subtest01
SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed.
Selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm
if the right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Module : Intel Calexico 802.11b/g (MoW)
G-code : G36C0000X310
PBA No. : C55369
*************************************************************
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key and return to the test menu.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
MAC Address Check
Subtest02
This subtest displays the MAC address. Selecting this subtest, following
message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, following message will appear in the
display.
*************************************************************
ERROR: MAC all 0
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
3-62
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)
Subtest03
Antenna check & communication test of 11b mode
Caution: To execute subtest 03-05, use another computer (with Calexico wireless LAN
card) that can communicate by the wireless LAN as a responder machine to
perform those tests. Access points are also required. (Access point for 802.11b
and 802.11g)
Be sure to turn the wireless communication switch ON before executing
wireless LAN communication test. (The wireless communication LED lights
orange.)
Release the write-protection of floppy disk for the test.
Setting the responder machine
Connect the responder machine to the access points (for 802.11b and 802.11g) with a cross
cable and turn on the access points.
Insert the floppy disk containing the wireless LAN test program into the FDD of the
responder machine and turn on the responder machine.
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN
antenna of Calexico 802.11b mode.
After finishing the test, OK message will appear in the display. Press any key
and return to the test menu.
When a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the
display. Press any key and following message will appear in the display.
Check which antenna (Main/Aux) is defective.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
Main Antenna Test : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main/Aux)
• Condition of wireless LAN communication (Interference/obstruction)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection and condition, execute the subtest again.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.27 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made b/g)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest04
Communication test of 11g mode
This subtest checks the communication of wireless LAN antenna of Calexico
802.11g mode.
After finishing the test, OK message will appear in the display. Press any key
and return to the test menu.
When a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the
display. Press any key and following message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
11g Communication Test : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main)
• Condition of wireless LAN communication (Interference/obstruction)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection and condition, execute the subtest again.
All the tests of Calexico 11b/g Card
Subtest05
This subtest checks SKU information, MAC address, connection and
communication of wireless LAN antenna of Calexico 802.11b/g card. The test
stops at when a defective is found. For more details, refer to each subtest.
3-64
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
3.28 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Intel-
made Calexico 802.11a/b/g). To execute the wireless LAN test, use the Diagnostics disk for
wireless LAN test. Finish the tests of the Main test program by selecting 99 - EXIT TO
DIAGNOSTICS MENU in the DIAGNOSTIC TEST MENU. Then in the DIAGNOSTICS
MENU, select 9 - EXIT TO MS-DOS.
Insert the Diagnostics disk for wireless LAN test into the Floppy Disk Drive. Turn on the
power while pressing U.
The following menu appears in the display.
***********************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Intel Calexico2 11a/g Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 : SKU check of Module
2 : MAC Address Check
3 : Antenna Check & communication test of 11b mode *
*
4 : Communication test of 11a mode
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
5 : Communication test of 11g mode
6 : All the tests of Calexico2 11a/g Card
(SKU & MAC Check, 11a/b/g communication test)
***********************************************************
SELECT TEST No, (1-6) :
To execute the subtest, input the subtest number and press Enter.
Subtest01
SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed.
Selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm
if the right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Module : Intel Calexico 802.11a/g (MoW)
G-code : G36C00018510
PBA No. : C67287
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
If a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the display.
Press any key and following message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
SKU NG !!
Other Card or Module not found
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
MAC Address Check
Subtest02
This subtest displays the MAC address. Selecting this subtest, following
message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
If a defective is found during the test, following message will appear in the
display.
*************************************************************
ERROR: MAC all F
MAC = XXXXXXXXXXXX
*************************************************************
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
3-66
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Antenna check & communication test of 11b mode
Subtest03
Caution: To execute subtest 03-06, use another computer (with Calexico wireless LAN
card) that can communicate by the wireless LAN as a responder machine to
perform those tests. Access points are also required. (Access point for 802.11a,
802.11b and 802.11g )
Be sure to turn the wireless communication switch ON before executing
wireless LAN communication test. (The wireless communication LED lights
orange.)
Release the write-protection of floppy disk for the test.
Setting the responder machine
Connect the responder machine to the access points (for 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g) with
a cross cable and turn on the access points.
Insert the floppy disk containing the wireless LAN test program into the FDD of the
responder machine and turn on the responder machine.
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN
antenna of Calexico 802.11b mode.
After finishing the test, OK message will appear in the display. Press any key
and return to the test menu.
When a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the
display. Press any key and following message will appear in the display.
Check which antenna (Main/Aux) is defective.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
Aux Antenna Test : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.28 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main/Aux)
• Condition of wireless LAN communication (Interference/obstruction)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection and condition, execute the subtest again.
Communication test of 11a mode
Subtest04
This subtest checks the communication of wireless LAN antenna of Calexico
802.11a mode.
After finishing the test, OK message will appear in the display. Press any key
and return to the test menu.
When a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the
display. Press any key and following message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : NG !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main)
• Condition of wireless LAN communication (Interference/obstruction)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection and condition, execute the subtest again.
3-68
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.28 Wireless LAN Test Program (Intel-made a/b/g)
Subtest05
Communication test of 11g mode
This subtest checks the communication of wireless LAN antenna of Calexico
802.11g mode.
For more details on procedure and contens of this subtest, refer to Subtest04
Communication test of 11a mode.
Subtest06
All the tests of Calexico 11a/b/g Card
This subtest checks SKU information, MAC address of Calexico 802.11a/b/g
card, antenna connection and communication test of Calexico 802.11b card
and communication test of Calexico 802.11a and Calexico 802.11g. The test
stops at when a defective is found. For more details, refer to each subtest.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.29 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)
This section describes how to perform the wireless LAN transmitting-receiving test (Askey-
made Atheros b/g, a/b/g).
Caution: To execute subtest 03-07, use another computer (with Atheros wireless LAN
card) that can communicate by the wireless LAN as a responder machine to
perform those tests.
Another wireless communication tool with 2.4GHz like Bluetooth is interfering
with the test. Execute this test in the condition where no interference around the
computer.
Be sure to turn the wireless communication switch ON before executing
wireless LAN communication test. (The wireless communication LED lights
orange.)
Release the write-protection of floppy disk for the test.
Setting the responder machine
To execute subtest 03-07, responder machine with wireless LAN communication function
(Atheros-made) is required. To set the responder machine, follow the procedures below.
1. Insert the test program disk to the FDD of responder machine and turn on the power.
2. Start the program for responder machine automatically.
3. The program for responder machine is set.
Setting the tester (DUT) machine
1. Insert the test program disk 1 to the FDD of tester machine and turn on the power.
2. The program disk 1 is executed and following message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Atheros MB4x Maintenance T&D (DUT)
Please exchange for DUT media 2
*************************************************************
Please input the “S” key and push the “Enter” key :
3. Take out the program disk 1 and insert program disk 2. Then, press S and Enter.
4. Executing program disk 2, following menu will appear in the display. To execute the
subtest, press test number and Enter.
3-70
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)
***********************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Atheros MB4x(MB44ag/43g) Maintenance T&D Menu
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 : SKU check of Module
2 : MAC Address Check
3 : Communication test of 11a mode(MB44ag)
4 : Communication test of 11b mode(MB44ag/MB43g)
5 : Communication test of 11g mode(MB44ag/MB43g)
6 : All the tests of MB43g Module
(SKU & MAC Check, 11b/g communication test)
7 : All the tests of MB44ag Module
(SKU & MAC Check, 11a/b/g communication test)
***********************************************************
SELECT TEST No, (1-7) :
Subtest01
SKU check of module
This subtest displays SKU information on the wireless LAN card installed.
Selecting this subtest, following message will appear in the display. Confirm
if the right information on the wireless LAN card is described.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Module : Atheros MB44ag (RoW)
G code : G36C00010310
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Using a wrong wireless LAN card (Using unspecified card)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.29 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest02
MAC Address Check
This subtest displays the MAC address. Selecting this subtest, following
message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
MAC Address Check : OK !!
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Defective wireless LAN card
• Disappearance of MAC address data
Checking the connection, execute the subtest again.
Communication test of 11a mode (MB44ag)
Subtest03
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN
antenna of Atheros 802.11a mode. Check the packet, throughput and RSSI and
compare them with the standard.
After finishing the test, OK message will appear in the display. Press any key
and return to the test menu.
When a defective is found during the test, NG message will appear in the
display. Press any key and following message will appear in the display.
*************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
11a Communication Test : NG !!
Please refer to log. txt
*************************************************************
Press any key and return to the test menu.
Open the log file (log.txt) and check the result.
3-72
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.29 Wireless LAN Test Program (Askey-made)
When a defective is detected in the test, following typical cause is considered.
• Connection of wireless LAN card
• Connection of wireless LAN antenna cable (Main/Aux)
• Condition of wireless LAN communication (Interference/obstruction)
• Defective wireless LAN card
Checking the connection and condition, execute the subtest again.
Communication test of 11b mode (MB44ag/MB43g)
Subtest04
Subtest05
Subtest06
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN
antenna of Atheros 802.11b mode.
For more details on the contents, refer to subtest 03.
Communication test of 11g mode (MB44ag/MB43g)
This subtest checks the connection and communication of wireless LAN
antenna of Atheros 802.11g mode.
For more details on the contents, refer to subtest 03.
All the tests of MB43g Module
This subtest checks SKU information, MAC address, connection and
communication of wireless LAN antenna of Atheros 802.11b mode and
Atheros 802.11g mode. The test stops at when a defective is found. For more
details, refer to each subtest.
Subtest07
All the tests of MB44ag Module
This subtest checks SKU information, MAC address, connection and
communication of wireless LAN antenna of Atheros 802.11a mode, Atheros
802.11b mode and Atheros 802.11g mode. The test stops at when a defective
is found. For more details, refer to each subtest.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
This section describes how to perform the LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test with the
test program.
Insert the test program disk for LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test in FDD and turn on
the power. The following message will appear:
Microsoft Windows XX Startup Menu
----------------------------------
1. LAN
2. Modem
3. Bluetooth
4. IEEE1394
Enter a choice:
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
NOTE: It is impossible to go back to startup menu once you choose the test. Therefore,
LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 test can not be executed successively.
3.30.1
LAN test
To execute LAN test, press 1 and Enter. The following message will appear:
####################################################################
######### i82562 ICHx Gbe (i82540) Diagnostics program
#####
####################################################################
*
*
* 1 ............ (i82562 + ICHx)
*
*
*
*
*
* 2 ............ (Gbe)
*
********************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-2] ?
Press the number you want to test and press Enter.
3-74
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
Subtest01
(i82562 + ICHx)
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the
chip.
The following message will appear:
[LAN transmit & receive test !]
COMPLETED Repeat count =
Error count =
00000
00000
LOOPBACK TEST
100Mbps Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
Destination Address
Source Address
= xxxxxxxxxxxx
= xxxxxxxxxxxx
** 100Base-TX Full-Duplex **
< TRANSMIT >
< RECEIVE >
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest02
(GbE)
CAUTION: Gigabit Ethernet test is not supported for this model.
This subtest checks the operation of mini-PCI I/F by the loopback test in the
chip. Select 2 to execute and press Enter.
The following message will appear:
Testing adaptor...hit <ESC> to abort.
*
External Loopback Test...PASSED
Testing completed.
*
*
Loopback Test Complete
*
*
* 1000Base Auto-negotiation TxRx Test
*
* CE Test Complete
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
If a defective is found, NG message will appear in the display.
3-76
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3.30.2
Modem test
For this subtest, connect the modem PCB and RJ11 connector with a harness. Use the
dedicated “FAT-MODE inspection device (product code: QE2000P01 made by Nitto Denki
Seisakusyo)” for the tests.
To execute Modem test, press 2 and Enter. Following message will appear:
[Modem loopback test !]
ICHx MDC Test Program with Modem Sound (Line Test)
Version X.X
* Scorpio Modem Initialize
* Digital Loopback Test
:OK
:OK
* RJ11 Connector Check (LED)
:(Operator’s Check!!)
NOTE: The menu displayed by your computer may be slightly different from the one
shown above.
RJ11 Connection Check (LED) (Operator’s Check LED) test will be executed, and the
following message will appear:
...Press Key (Y = OK , N =NG)
If the color in the LED of the connection checker is orange, press Y, otherwise, press N.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30.3
Bluetooth test
To execute this test, input 3 and press Enter.
Note: Use another computer that can communicate by the Bluetooth as a reference
machine to perform this test.
Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the target machine and turn on the target
machine. The following Bluetooth test menu will appear:
######################################################################
####
Bluetooth sub system test program VX.XX
####
######################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1....BD_ADDR check
3... Communications test (DUT mode)
T....communications test (TEST mode)
**********************************************************************
....Press test number [1, 3, T] ? _
Press 1 or 3 key to perform the corresponding subtest. To quit the Bluetooth test program,
eject the floppy disk and turn the computer off while the menu above is displayed.
3-78
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
Subtest01
BD_ADDR check
This subtest checks the BD_ADDR functions. When the Bluetooth test menu
is displayed, press 1 to select the test and press Enter. The following message
will appear:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initializing …
When the machine has passed the test, it displays BD_ADDR. If BD_ADDR
has no problem, the following message is displayed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
My BD_ADDR = XXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
PPPPPP
A
SSSSS
SSSSS
SSSSS
SSSSS
P
P
P
A A
S
S S
S
S
P A
A S
PPPPPP A
A SSSSS
P
P
P
AAAAAAA
S
S
S
A
A
A S
A SSSSS
S S
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
If the target machine has any problem, it displays Error CODE. The following
message is displayed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(BD_ADDR) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
My BD_ADDR = XXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
FFFFFF
A
III
I
L
F
A A
L
F
A
A
I
L
FFFFFF A
A
I
L
F
F
F
AAAAAAA
I
L
A
A
A
A
I
L
III
LLLLLLL
Table 3-5 Error message
Message
Contents
Invalid BD_ADDR (all 00)
Invalid BD_ADDR (all FF)
Invalid BD_ADDR (bit0=1)
Invalid BD_ADDR (bit1=1)
Invalid BD_ADDR (define in the file)
0x000000000000
0xFFFFFFFFFFFF
bit40=1b
bit41=1b
Defined BD_ADDR
3-80
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
If the machine detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as shown
below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) (1/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0a
0x0b
0x0c
0x0d
0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1a
0x1b
0x1c
0x1d
0x1e
0x1f
Unknown HCI Command.
No Connection.
Hardware Failure.
Page Timeout.
Authentication Failure.
Key Missing.
Memory Full.
Connection Timeout.
Max Number Of Connections.
Max Number Of SCO Connections To A Device.
ACL Connection already exists.
Command Disallowed.
Host Rejected due to limited resources.
Host Rejected due to security reasons.
Host Rejected due to remote device is only a personal device.
Host Timeout.
Unsupported Feature or Parameter Value.
Invalid HCI Command Parameters.
Other End Terminated Connection: Used Ended Connection.
Other End Terminated Connection: Low Resources.
Other End Terminated Connection: About to Power Off.
Connection Terminated by Local Host.
Repeated Attempts.
Paring Not Allowed.
Unknown LMP PDU.
Unsupported Remote Feature.
SCO Offset Rejected.
SCO Interval Rejected.
SCO Air Mode Rejected.
Invalid LMP Parameters.
Unspecified Error.
** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System for details.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-6 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR) (2/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2a
0x2b
0x2c
0x2d
0x2e
0x2f
Unsupported LMP Parameter Value.
Role Change Not Allowed.
LMP Response Timeout.
LMP Error Transaction Collision.
LMP PDU Not Allowed.
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
Subtest03
Communication test (DUT mode)
This subtest checks the Bluetooth communication functions. Preparing the tester machine for
the Bluetooth test program. Insert a floppy disk containing the test program into the tester
machine and turn on the tester machine. The Bluetooth test menu will appear:
Press 3 to select the test and press Enter in the target machine. The following message will
appear:
When the test begins, the machine displays BD_ADDR of the DUT. The progress bar
stops when the test is completed. The following message is displayed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+----------------------+
|
DUT
|
BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
Ready>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
<- Progress Bar
[ESC] : Stop
3-82
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
When the Bluetooth test menu is displayed, press T to select the test and press Enter in the
test machine. The following message will appear:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+------------------+
|
|
|
|
Tester
|
|
+------------------+
[ESC]:Finish Tester [SPACE]:Start
Is DUT ready?
Then press Space to start the Bluetooth communication test.
When the machine has passed the test, it displays BD_ADDR of the DUT. If the connection
with the tester is completed, the progress bar stops. The following message is shown.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+----------------------+
|
DUT
|
BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
CCCC
CCCC
OOO
OOO
M
M PPPPPP L
EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE DDDDD
C
C
C O
O MM
MM P
P L
P L
E
T
E
E
D
D
D
D
C
C
C
O
O
O M M M M P
E
T
T
T
T
T
D
D
D
O M M M PPPPPP L
EEEEEE
EEEEEEE D
O
O M
O M
M
M P
M P
M P
L
L
E
E
E
E
D
D
C O
LLLLLLL EEEEEE
EEEEEEE DDDDD
Testing is finished
A>_
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
If the target machine has any problem, the following message “INCOMPLETE” is displayed
with the Error Code.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluetooth Subsystem T&D for PCSE(CS-Air) VerX.XX Copyright (C) by TOSHIBA Co.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+----------------------+
|
DUT
|
BD_ADDR of the DUT = XXXXXXXXXXXXX [h]
+----------------------+
III N
N
CCCC
CCCC
OOO
OOO
M
M PPPPPP L
EEEEEE TTTTTTT EEEEEEE
I
NN
N N
N C
C O
O MM
MM P
P L
P L
E
T
E
I
I
I
I
N C
O
O
O M M M M P
E
T
T
T
T
T
E
N N N C
O M M M PPPPPP L
EEEEEE
EEEEEEE
N
N
N N C
NN C
N
O
O M
O M
M
M P
M P
M P
L
L
E
E
E
C O
E
III N
LLLLLLL EEEEEE
EEEEEEE
Testing is finished
_Press any key to continue. . .
3-84
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
If the machine detects a malfunction, it indicates the error code as shown below.
The error code begins with the least significant digit.
Error code
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (1/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x05
0x06
0x07
0x08
0x09
0x0a
0x0b
0x0c
0x0d
0x0e
0x0f
0x10
0x11
0x12
0x13
0x14
0x15
0x16
0x17
0x18
0x19
0x1a
0x1b
0x1c
0x1d
0x1e
0x1f
Unknown HCI Command.
No Connection.
Hardware Failure.
Page Timeout.
Authentication Failure.
Key Missing.
Memory Full.
Connection Timeout.
Max Number Of Connections.
Max Number Of SCO Connections To A Device.
ACL Connection already exists.
Command Disallowed.
Host Rejected due to limited resources.
Host Rejected due to security reasons.
Host Rejected due to remote device is only a personal device.
Host Timeout.
Unsupported Feature or Parameter Value.
Invalid HCI Command Parameters.
Other End Terminated Connection: Used Ended Connection.
Other End Terminated Connection: Low Resources.
Other End Terminated Connection: About to Power Off.
Connection Terminated by Local Host.
Repeated Attempts.
Paring Not Allowed.
Unknown LMP PDU.
Unsupported Remote Feature.
SCO Offset Rejected.
SCO Interval Rejected.
SCO Air Mode Rejected.
Invalid LMP Parameters.
Unspecified Error.
** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Table 3-7 Error code for Bluetooth test (BD_ADDR of the DUT) (2/2)
Error code
Meaning
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x23
0x24
0x25
0x26
0x27
0x28
0x29
0x2a
0x2b
0x2c
0x2d
0x2e
0x2f
Unsupported LMP Parameter Value.
Role Change Not Allowed.
LMP Response Timeout.
LMP Error Transaction Collision.
LMP PDU Not Allowed.
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
Not Exist
** See the Specification of the Bluetooth System in detail.
3-86
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.30 LAN/Modem/Bluetooth/IEEE1394 Test Program
3.30.4
IEEE1394 test
To execute this test, input 4 and press Enter.
NOTE:
Use another computer that can communicate by IEEE1394 (i. Link) cable as a
reference machine to perform this test.
The following menu will appear:
********************************************************************
********
IEEE1394[XXXXX] Diagnostics program
**************
********************************************************************
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ....(Transmit & Receive test)
2 ....(Responder set)
3 ....(1394 GUID Display)
********************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3] ?
To execute the TEST, select the test number you want to execute and press Enter.
Subtest01
Transmit & Receive test
NOTE:
Before executing subtest 01, be sure to execute subtest 02 in the responder
machine.
This program checks the data transporting between responder machine and
target machine and compare them with the original data through the
IEEE1394 cable.
Subtest02
Subtest03
Responder set
This program is executed in the responder machine to initialize the responder
machine with the IEEE1394 cable connected to the target machine before
executing subtest 01.
IEEE1394 GUID Display
This program checks the GUID of IEEE1394.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.31 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3
Tests and Diagnostics
3.31 Sound Test program
This section describes how to perform the Sound test. To execute the sound test, refer to the
following description.
Insert the test program disk for Sound test in the floppy disk drive and turn on the power. The
following message will appear:
################################################################
######
WSS, Sound blaster pro Diagnostics program
######
################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ............ Sound (Standard)
2 ............ Sound (Legacy)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
3 ............ CD Sound (Standard)
4 ............ CD Sound (Legacy)
---It outputs at the speaker and lineout---
****************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-4] ?
Input the test number and press Enter.
3.31.1 Sound (Standard) test
To execute the Sound (Standard) test, press 1 and Enter. The following menu will appear in
the display.
################################################################
######
ICH4-M + AD1981A Diagnostics program
######
################################################################
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1 ............
2 ............
3 ............
( Microphone recording & play )
( Sine wave )
*
*
*
*
*
*
( Line IN recording & play )
9 ............
Exit to Main
****************************************************************
.... Press test number[1-3, 9] ?
3-88
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.31 Sound Test program
To return to the Sound test menu, Press 9 and Enter. Then following message will appear in
the display.
***********************************
******** May I Restart ? *******
***********************************
Press any key to continue…
After pressing any key, the machine starts rebooting and sound test menu will appear in the
display.
Subtest01
Microphone recording & play
This subtest checks the function of the CODEC A/D, D/A converter.
When this subtest is selected, the following message will appear.
[Recording & play test !]
And the following message will appear.
DOS/4GW Protected Mode Run-time Version X.XX
Copyright (c) Tenberry Software, Inc. XXXX
After this message appears, display stops briefly. In this timing, sound is
recorded from internal microphone.
After the recording is completed, the computer plays back the sound recorded
after the following message.
STACWAVE Version X.XX
Build data: XXX XX XXXX at XX:XX:XX
Loading “mic.wav”.
NOTE:
The message in the display might have slight difference from those above.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.31 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest02
Sine Wave
This subtest is executed by loading the COM file (ADSIN.COM). The
program expands sine wave data table from 16KB to 64KB, and creates the
play data. Then it transfers the data between the DMA and the CODEC to
play the sine wave. (It sounds like a continuous beep). By using wave
measurable devices such as an oscilloscope, the data can be measured as a
sine wave.
When the subtest is executed, the sine wave is played while expanding sine
wave from 16KB to 64KB.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
Line IN recording & play
Subtest03
This subtest executes the same test as the subtest01 by recorded sound from
the different port (Line-in port).
For more details on the subtest, refer to the subtest01 Microphone recording &
play.
The display returns to the Sound (Standard) test menu after the test ends.
3.31.2 Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the Sound (Legacy) test, select 2 and press Enter.
CAUTION: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.
3-90
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.31 Sound Test program
3.31.3 CD Sound (Standard) test
To execute the CD Sound (Standard) test, press 3 and Enter. Insert the test media
(TOSHIBA TEST CD-ROM or ABEX TEST CD-ROM) or music CD on the market (if the
test media can not be prepared). Following menu appears in the display.
For details on use of test media, refer to (1) Test media (Toshiba-made test media).
For details on use of audio CD on the market, refer to (2) Audio CD.
(1) Test media (Toshiba-made test media)
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
CD/DVD TEST IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
; key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
STATUS : XXX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
01 – Japanese Narration
02 – English Narration
03 – Test Tone A (100Hz – 20Hz)
04 - Test Tone B (400Hz – 3KHz L-R)
Drive # = 0, ATAPI status =00
Command = XX
[[Block address = XXXXXXXX]]
[[Block length = XXXXXXXX]]
Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX
Subtest01
Japanese Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in Japanese starts and following message
appears in the display.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key <Play stop>.
Press any key and stop the narration. Then return to the CD Sound (Standard)
test menu.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.31 Sound Test program
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Subtest02
English Narration
Selected this subtest, narration in English starts.
For more details on the procedure, refer to the subtest01.
Test Tone A
Subtest03
Caution: Before starting subtest03, be sure to set the sound at proper volume.
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 100Hz to 20Hz.
Return to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
Subtest 04
Test Tone B
This subtest plays sine wave while changing its table from 400Hz to 3KHz
and also changing the channel from left speaker to right speaker.
Return to the CD Sound (Standard) menu after the test ends.
3-92
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.31 Sound Test program
(2) Audio CD
Insert an audio CD and the following menu appears in the display.
xxxxxxx DIAGNOSTIC TEST VX.XX
[Ctrl]+[Break] ; test end
CD/DVD TEST IN PROGRESS XXXXXXXX
[Ctrl]+[C]
; key stop
SUB-TEST : XX
PASS COUNT : XXXXX
WRITE DATA : XX
ERROR COUNT: XXXXX
READ DATA : XX
STATUS : XXX
ADDRESS
: XXXXXX
CD Sound track number (01-98 : Track) ?
Drive # = 0, ATAPI status =00
Command = XX
[[Block address = XXXXXXXX]]
[[Block length = XXXXXXXX]]
Final : Block address = XXXXXXXXX
Select the track number you want to test and press Enter twice.
The following message appears in the display and selected track is played.
Play start CD sound !
Press any key <play stop>
After pressing any key, the music stops and the display returns to the selection menu of the
track number.
NOTE:
When the CD-ROM test is executed, "ALL DEVICE" must be selected in the
[Device Config.] of the BIOS SETUP. If the "ALL DEVICE" is not selected,
music can not be played.
3.31.4 CD Sound (Legacy) test
To execute the CD Sound (Legacy) test, select 4 and press Enter.
CAUTION: Sound (Legacy) test is not supported in this model.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
3.32.1 Function Description
This program displays the current system setup information as listed below:
1. Memory
2. System Date/Time
3. Battery
4. Password
5. HDD Password
(a) HDD
(b) HDD Password mode
(c) User Password
(d) Mater Password
6. Boot Priority
(a) Boot Priority
(b) Network Boot Protocol
7. Display
(a) Power On Display
(b) LCD Display Stretch
8. Others
(a) Power-up Mode
(b) CPU Cache
(c) Level 2 Cache
(d) Dynamic CPU Frequency Mode
(e) Auto Power On
(f) Panel power On/Off
(g) Performance/Battery Life Setting
9. Configuration
10. I/O Ports
(a) Serial
(b) Parallel
11. Drives I/O
(a) Built-in HDD
(b) CD-ROM
12. PCI Bus
13. Peripheral
(a) Internal Pointing Device
(b) External keyboard "Fn"
3-94
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
(c) Parallel Port Mode
(d) Hard Disk Mode
14. LEGACY EMULATION
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
15. PCI LAN
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32.2 Accessing the SETUP Program
Selecting 0 from the DIAGNOSTICS MENU and pressing Enter displays the followings:
NOTE:
*1. This item is displayed only when Pentium model is used for CPU.
*2. This item is displayed only when "Resume" is set as [Power-up mode] in
[OTHERS] menu box.
3-96
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
Moving Within the SETUP Menu and Changing Values
1. Press Å and Æ to move between the two columns. Press ↑ and ↓ to move between
items in a column. Press Fn+↑ (PgUp) and Fn + ↓ (PgDn) to move between the
two pages.
2. Press either the Space bar or Back Space to change the value.
Accepting Changes and Exiting the SETUP Window
1. Press End to accept the changes you made.
If the changed item does not require the system to reboot, the following message is
displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
If the changed item requires the system to reboot, the following message is displayed:
Are you sure? (Y/N)
The changes you made will cause the system to reboot.
2. To make other changes, press N. Repeat the steps above.
3. To accept the changes, press Y.
NOTE: You can press Esc to quit at any time without saving changes. SETUP asks you
to confirm that you do not want to save your changes. When SETUP is displayed
at the next time, the current configuration appears.
The Factory Preset Configuration
When you access SETUP, the current configuration is displayed.
1. To show the factory preset configuration, press Home.
2. To accept the default settings, press End and then press Y.
NOTE: When you execute the default setting, the following settings are not changed:
(1) HDD Mode
(2) Password
(3) Write Policy
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
SETUP Options
The SETUP screen is divided into 15 functionally related groups. This section describes each
group and its options.
1. Memory
This group of options displays the computer’s memory.
This field displays the total amount of memory installed and is automatically
calculated by the computer. You cannot change this value.
2. System Date/Time
Sets the date and time.
System Date
System Time
Sets date.
Sets time.
3. Battery
This option is used to select Full Power, Low Power or User Setting of the battery
save mode. When you select the battery save mode, the followings will appear.
Full Power
The following shows full power settings.
Low Power
The following shows low power settings.
NOTE: Display of the LCD Brightness will be changed in the condition below:
(*1) Operating the battery
(*2) Using the AC adapter
3-98
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
User Setting
Use this option to set the battery save parameters on
the sub-window, BATTERY SAVE OPTIONS.
Battery Save Options
Processing Speed
This feature changes the CPU processing speed.
High
CPU operates at 1.10GHz (Pentium-M),
at 900MHz (Celeron-M)
(Default in Full Power Mode)
Low
CPU operates at half processing speed.
(Default in Low Power Mode)
CPU Sleep Mode
Use this option to enable or disable the CPU sleep function.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables sleep mode. (Default)
Disables sleep mode.
Display Auto Off
Use this option to disable or set the duration of the display automatic power
off function. This function causes the computer to turn the LCD panel’s
illumination off if you make no entry (including no operation of a mouse or
touch pad) for the set period of time.
Disabled
xx Min.
Disables display automatic power off.
Automatically turns off the power to the LCD panel’s
illumination if the panel is not used for the duration set.
The duration xx can be set to 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30
minutes.
HDD Auto Off
Use this option to set the duration of the HDD automatic power off function.
xx Min.
Automatically turns off the power to the hard disk drive
if it is not used for the duration set. The duration xx
can be set to 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
LCD Brightness
Use this option to set the level of LCD brightness.
Super-Bright
Bright
Full brightness for maximum visibility.
Full brightness for high visibility.
Semi-Bright
Less than full brightness for saving power.
Cooling Method
Maximum Performance
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on
automatically in a high speed to cool down the
CPU.
Performance
If the CPU becomes too hot, the fan turns on
automatically. When the CPU temperature falls
to a normal range, the fan turns off.
Battery optimized
If the CPU becomes too hot, the processing
speed is lowered. If the temperature is still too
high, the fan turns on. When the CPU
temperature falls to a normal range, the fan is
turned off and the processing speed is increased.
NOTE: Too hot condition may cause defect on the CPU. When the hot condition
continues, the power is automatically turned off in resume mode.
4. Password
This option sets or resets the user password for power on and instant security
(Fn+F1).
Registered
The user password has been registered.
The user password has not been registered.
Not registered
For details on setting the user password, refer to the User’s Manual.
5. HDD Password
This option registers, resets or changes the HDD password.
(a) HDD
Selects hard disk for setting the password.
Built-in HDD
The password is set to Built-in HDD.
3-100
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
(b) HDD Password Mode
Select the HDD password to be registered. This can be selected only when the
user HDD password or master password is not registered. When the user HDD
password or master password is registered, once delete it and select the mode.
User Only
Sets the User HDD Password only. (Default)
Master+User
Sets the Master HDD Password and User HDD
Password.
(c) User Password
Sets the User HDD Password.
For details, refer to the User’s Manual.
(d) Master Password
Sets the Master HDD Password. This can be set when Master+User is set in
the HDD password Mode. For details, refer to the User’s Manual.
6. Boot Priority
(a) Boot Priority
Use this option to set the priority for booting of the computer and the priority
for the HDD for booting.
FDD→HDD→CD-ROM→LAN: The computer looks for bootable files in
the following order: FDD, HDD, CD-
ROM (*1) and LAN
HDD→CD-ROM→LAN→FDD: The computer looks for bootable files in
the following order: HDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and FDD.
FDD→CD-ROM→LAN→HDD: The computer looks for bootable files in
the following order: FDD, CD-ROM,
LAN and HDD.
CD-ROM→LAN→HDD→FDD: The computer looks for bootable files in
the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
HDD and FDD.
CD-ROM→LAN→FDD→HDD: The computer looks for bootable files in
the following order: CD-ROM, LAN,
FDD and HDD.
HDD→FDD→CD-ROM→LAN: The computer looks for bootable files in
the following order: HDD, FDD, CD-
ROM and LAN. (Default)
(*1) CD-ROM refers to a Optical Disk Drive.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
(b) Network Boot Protocol
Use this option to set the starting method via a network.
PXE Sets to PXE protocol. (Default)
RPL Sets to RPL protocol.
7. Display
This group of options configures the computer’s display.
(a) Power On Display
This option is used to select the display when booting up.
Auto-Selected
Selects an external monitor if one is connected.
Otherwise it selects the internal LCD. (Default)
LCD+AnalogRGB Selects both the internal LCD and the external CRT for
simultaneous display.
NOTE: When starting the computer in Standby or Hibernation, the last configuration is
saved. If data does not appear on the display you are using after starting in
Standby or Hibernation, pressing Fn+F5.
Pressing Fn+F5 changes the display setting as follows in order: the internal
LCD, the external CRT, both the internal LCD and the external CRT.
When an external CRT display, which does not support SVGA mode is connected
and “LCD+AnalogRGB” is selected, the external display is not displayed.
(b) LCD Display Stretch
LCD Display Stretch enables or disables a larger display area of the screen.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the LCD display stretch feature. (Default)
Disables the LCD display stretch feature.
8. Others
Whether or not you need to configure the computer with these options depends
primarily on the kind of software or peripherals you use.
(a) Power-up Mode
Use this option to choose between resume and boot mode.
Boot
Turns on boot mode. (Default)
Turns on resume mode.
Resume
3-102
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
(b) CPU Cache
Use this option to enable or disable the CPU cache.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the CPU cache. (Default)
Disables the CPU cache.
(c) Level 2 Cache
Use this option to enable or disable the level 2 cache. When "CPU Cache" is
set to "Disabled", this option cannot be changed.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the level 2 cache. (Default)
Disables the level 2 cache.
(d) Dynamic CPU Frequency mode
Use this option to choose a setting from the followings. When the CPU of the
computer is Celeron-M, this option is not displayed.
Dynamically Switchable
Enables Pentium-M processor featuring Intel SpeedStep
technology. (Default)
Always High
Always Low
Disables Pentium-M processor featuring Intel
SpeedStep technology and always runs the processor at
its maximum speed.
Disables Pentium-M processor featuring Intel
SpeedStep technology and always runs the processor at
its default speed.
(e) Auto Power On
This option displays setting for Auto Power On.
Disabled
Enabled
Indicates auto power on is not set.
Indicates auto power on is set.
When “Enabled” is selected, the following sub-window appears.
OPTIONS
Alarm Time
= 00:00:00
= Disabled
= Disabled
= Disabled
Alarm Date Option
Ring Indicator
Wake-up on LAN
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
Set the parameters for the Auto Power On (automatic power on) function in
the “OPTIONS” window. To set the time, use Space or BackSpace. Press
↓ to move the cursor to the right and ↑ to move the cursor to the left when
you set the date and time.
For the Alarm Time, set the time to turn on the power automatically. The
“second” cannot be set. When it is set to “Disabled”, the time to turn on
automatically is not set.
For the Alarm Date Option, set the date to turn on the power automatically.
When it is set to “Disabled”, the time to turn on automatically is not set.
The Ring Indicator is displayed only when the computer is in Resume mode
and this function cannot be used for a PC card-type modem. When any
modem is not installed, it is not displayed.
The Wake-up on LAN is a function to turn on the power automatically by the
call from the administrator. It can be set to “Enabled” only when “Built-in
LAN” is set to “Enabled”. To activate this function, use the AC adapter.
NOTE: 1. Do not remove the AC adaptor and battery pack at the same time when you
use this feature. If you do so, data saved by the resume function will be lost.
You must also reset this option.
2. If you have set a password and the computer boots by the Auto Power On
function and Standby is on, the computer will start with the instant security
function enabled. The password = message is not displayed; however, you
must enter the password to use the computer.
3. This option is enabled only once, the setting is reset, after booting up.
(f) Panel Power On/Off
This option is displayed only in the resume mode.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the Panel Power On/Off.
Disables the Panel Power On/Off. (Default)
(g) Performance/Battery Life Setting
Use this option to choose a setting of Memory Bus Clock and Graphics Core
Clock from the followings.
Performance
BatteryLife
Initial setting. (Default)
Saving power by setting in lower clock and voltage.
3-104
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
When this item is selected, the following sub-window appears. The sub-
window displays different clock depending on the memory module type.
(DDR333 or DDR 266)
[DDR333 memory module] ;
Battery Life
Performance
Memory Bus Clock
Graphics Core Clock = 250MHz
= 333MHz
Memory Bus Clock
Graphics Core Clock = 200MHz
= 226MHz
Performance mode = 1.35V (Core Voltage)
Battery Life mode = 1.20V (Core Voltage)
[DDR266 memory module] ;
Performance
Battery Life
Memory Bus Clock
Graphics Core Clock = 200MHz
= 266MHz
Memory Bus Clock
Graphics Core Clock = 200MHz
= 226MHz
Performance mode = 1.35V (Core Voltage)
Battery Life mode = 1.20V (Core Voltage)
9. Configuration
This option lets you set the device configuration.
All Devices
BIOS sets all devices.
Setup by OS
Initializes devices, which is needed to load an operating
system. Operating system initializes other devices.
NOTE: (1) When using installed OS, selecting “Setup by OS” is recommended.
(2) When executing test programs, be sure to select “ALL Device”. And after
the test end, select “Setup by OS”.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
10. I/O ports
This option controls settings for the serial and parallel ports.
NOTE: This item can be set only when the Advanced Port Replicator III is connected.
(a) Serial
Use this option to set the COM level for the serial port. The serial port
interrupt request level (IRQ) and I/O port base address for each COM level is
shown below:
COM level
COM1
Interrupt level
I/O address
3F8H
4
3
4
5
7
3
5
7
(Default)
COM2
2F8H
COM3
3E8H
COM3
3E8H
COM3
3E8H
COM4
2E8H
COM4
2E8H
COM4
2E8H
Not Used
Disables port
(b) Parallel
This option sets the interrupt request level and I/O port base address for the
parallel port. When the parallel port mode is set to Std. Bi-direct, the options
are as follows:
LPT setting
LPT 1
Interrupt level
I/O address
378H
7
5
7
LPT 2
278H
LPT 3
3BCH
Not Used
Disables port
When the parallel port mode (see settings below) is set to ECP, the DMA
channel can also be set to 1 or 3. The default is 3.
LPT setting
LPT 1
Interrupt level
I/O address
378H
DMA channel
7
5
7
3 (Default)
LPT 2
278H
3
3
LPT 3
3BCH
Not Used
Disables port
3-106
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
When you select one of the above options, except for Not Used, a subwindow
similar to the one below appears to let you set the DMA. The options for this
setting are Channel 1and Channel 3 (Default).
OPTIONS
DMA
= Channel 3 (Default)
For most printers, the port should be set to ECP. With some other parallel
devices, the setting should be Std. Bi-Direct.
11. Drives I/O
This option displays the address and interrupt level for hard disk drive and optical
disk drive. It is for information only and cannot be changed.
Built-in HDD
CD-ROM
This cannot be changed.
This cannot be changed. This is not displayed when a drive
is not built-in.
12. PCI Bus
This option displays the interrupt level for the Card Bus in the computer. It is for
information only and cannot be changed.
PCI BUS
= IRQ10, IRQ11
13. Peripheral
Use this option to select the peripheral's mode.
(a) Internal Pointing Device
This option enables or disables the touch pad
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the touch pad. (Default)
Disables the touch pad.
(b) Ext Keyboard "Fn"
This option enables or disables Fn key function on the external keyboard.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables the feature.
Disables the feature. (Default)
When “Enabled” is selected, the following sub-window appears.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
KEYBOARD
Ext Keyboar d " Fn" key equi val ent
= Left Ctrl + Left Alt
Use this option to set a key combination on an external keyboard to emulate
the Fn key on the computer's internal keyboard. Setting a Fn key equivalent
will enable you to use “Hotkeys” by pressing the set combination in place of
the Fn key. The following items can be selected for this option:
= Left Ctrl + Left Alt (*1)
= Right Ctrl + Right Alt (*2)
= Left Alt + Left Shift
= Right Alt + Right Shift
= Left Alt + Caps Lock
NOTE: If these selections ((*1) or (*2)) are made, you cannot warm boot the
system by pressing Ctrl + Alt + Del.
(c) Parallel Port Mode
Use this option to set information of Parallel Port Mode.
ECP
Sets the port mode to Extended Capabilities Port (ECP).
For most printers, the port should be set to ECP. (Default)
Std. Bi-Direct.
Sets the bi-directional setting. This setting should be used
with some other parallel devices.
NOTE: When using Windows, the setting of “Toshiba HW setup” is enabled and the
setting of “Parallel Port Mode” is disabled.
(d) Hard Disk Mode
Use this option to select the hard disk mode.
Enhanced IDE (normal)
Select this mode when the HDD is used for MS-DOS®,
Windows 95/98/2000/XP, or OS/2®. (Default)
Standard IDE
Select this mode when using an OS which does not
support the Enhanced IDE. When this mode is selected,
up to 528MB is logically available and the rest of the
capacity is not usable.
3-108
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3.32 SETUP
NOTE: Formats for Enhanced IDE and Standard IDE are different, so if you change the
setting, you will have to reformat the hard disk for the appropriate setting.
14. LEGACY EMULATION
(a) USB KB/Mouse Legacy Emulation
This option sets the Legacy support condition of the USB keyboard and the USB
mouse.
Enabled
Enables LEGACY support. (Default)
USB keyboard/USB mouse are available without the driver.
Disabled
Disables LEGACY support
(b) USB-FDD Legacy Emulation
This option sets the Legacy support condition of the USB floppy disk drive.
When a computer is FDD built-in model, this option is not displayed.
Enabled
Enables LEGACY support. (Default)
USB floppy disk is available without the driver.
Disabled
Disables LEGACY support
15. PCI LAN
This option sets the Enable / Disable of the built-in LAN functions.
Enabled
Disabled
Enables built-in LAN functions. (Default)
Disables built-in LAN functions.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.32 SETUP
3 Tests and Diagnostics
3-110
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Replacement Procedures
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4-ii
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
Chapter 4
Contents
4.1
4.2
4.3
General....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Battery Pack............................................................................................................... 4-8
PC Card /SD card /CF card...................................................................................... 4-10
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
PC card ............................................................................................... 4-10
SD card............................................................................................... 4-11
CF card ............................................................................................... 4-12
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
HDD......................................................................................................................... 4-14
Memory module....................................................................................................... 4-17
Keyboard.................................................................................................................. 4-19
Switch membrane..................................................................................................... 4-22
Bluetooth.................................................................................................................. 4-24
Optical drive............................................................................................................. 4-25
4.10 Display assembly ..................................................................................................... 4-28
4.11 Speaker..................................................................................................................... 4-35
4.12 Touch pad................................................................................................................. 4-36
4.13 Wireless LAN card .................................................................................................. 4-38
4.14 RTC battery.............................................................................................................. 4-39
4.15 LAN jack.................................................................................................................. 4-40
4.16 System board............................................................................................................ 4-41
4.17 Microphone.............................................................................................................. 4-43
4.18 Fan............................................................................................................................ 4-44
4.19 Cooling fin ............................................................................................................... 4-45
4.20 HDD FPC................................................................................................................. 4-47
4.21 Modem..................................................................................................................... 4-48
4.22 DC-IN jack............................................................................................................... 4-50
4.23 PC card slot cover.................................................................................................... 4-51
4.24 Display latch ............................................................................................................ 4-53
4.25 Battery lock/Battery latch ........................................................................................ 4-55
4.26 LCD mask ................................................................................................................ 4-56
4.27 LCD unit/FL inverter............................................................................................... 4-58
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.28 PC card slot cover.................................................................................................... 4-63
4.29 Wireless LAN antennas/Front panel........................................................................ 4-65
4.30 Hinge........................................................................................................................ 4-67
4.31 Fluorescent lamp...................................................................................................... 4-68
4.31.1 Disassembling fluorescent lamp......................................................... 4-69
4.31.2 Assembling fluorescent lamp............................................................. 4-73
Figures
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Removing the battery pack ............................................................................ 4-8
Removing a PC card .................................................................................... 4-10
Removing a SD card.................................................................................... 4-11
Removing a CF card .................................................................................... 4-12
Removing the dummy card.......................................................................... 4-13
Inserting a CF card....................................................................................... 4-13
Removing the HDD assembly ..................................................................... 4-14
Removing the HDD ..................................................................................... 4-15
Removing a memory module....................................................................... 4-17
Figure 4-10 Removing the screw (fixing keyboard) ....................................................... 4-19
Figure 4-11 Removing the speaker cover........................................................................ 4-20
Figure 4-12 Removing the keyboard............................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-13 Removing the switch membrane.................................................................. 4-22
Figure 4-14 Removing a bluetooth module..................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-15 Removing an optical drive assembly........................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-16 Removing the brackets................................................................................. 4-26
Figure 4-17 Removing screws (bottom).......................................................................... 4-28
Figure 4-18 Removing the screws and cables ................................................................ 4-29
Figure 4-19 Removing the antenna cables ...................................................................... 4-30
Figure 4-20 Removing the display assembly................................................................... 4-31
Figure 4-21 Removing the cover assembly ..................................................................... 4-32
Figure 4-22 Removing the speaker.................................................................................. 4-35
4-iv
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
Figure 4-23 Peeling off the cover sheet........................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-24 Removing the touch pad .............................................................................. 4-37
Figure 4-25 Removing the wireless LAN card................................................................ 4-38
Figure 4-26 Removing the RTC battery .......................................................................... 4-39
Figure 4-27 Removing the LAN jack .............................................................................. 4-40
Figure 4-28 Removing the system board......................................................................... 4-41
Figure 4-29 Removing the microphone........................................................................... 4-43
Figure 4-30 Removing the fan......................................................................................... 4-44
Figure 4-31 Removing the cooling fin............................................................................. 4-45
Figure 4-32 Applying silicon grease ............................................................................... 4-46
Figure 4-33 Removing the HDD FPC ............................................................................. 4-47
Figure 4-34 Removing the MDC..................................................................................... 4-48
Figure 4-35 Removing the modem jack .......................................................................... 4-49
Figure 4-36 Removing the DC-IN jack ........................................................................... 4-50
Figure 4-37 Removing the PC card slot cover................................................................. 4-51
Figure 4-38 Removing the LED panel............................................................................. 4-53
Figure 4-39 Disassembling the display latch assembly................................................... 4-53
Figure 4-40 Removing the battery lock/battery latch...................................................... 4-55
Figure 4-41 Removing the LCD mask............................................................................. 4-56
Figure 4-42 Removing the LCD unit............................................................................... 4-59
Figure 4-43 Removing the GND cable............................................................................ 4-60
Figure 4-44 Removing the LCD harness......................................................................... 4-63
Figure 4-45 Removing the wireless antennas.................................................................. 4-65
Figure 4-46 Removing the front panel............................................................................. 4-66
Figure 4-47 Removing the hinge ..................................................................................... 4-67
Figure 4-48 to 4-57
Replacing FL (12.1-inch TMD-made).............................................4-69 to 4-76
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4-vi
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
4
Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
This section explains how to disassemble the computer and replace Field Replaceable Units
(FRUs). It may not be necessary to remove all the FRUs in order to replace one. The chart
below is a guide to which FRUs need to be removed in order to remove others. Always start
by removing the battery pack, next, optional items such as the optional PC card and optional
SD card, then follow the line on the chart to determine which FRU you must remove next in
order to repair the one you think is causing the computer to operate improperly. Refer to the
example at the bottom of the page.
How to See the Chart
An example of referring to the
chart is shown below.
•Removing the Optical
drive
4.2 Battery pack to 4.4 HDD
directly above the optical
drive must be removed.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 General
4 Replacement Procedures
Safety Precautions
Before you begin disassembly, read the following safety precautions and observe them
carefully as you work.
DANGER: 1) Always use the genuine battery that is authorized by Toshiba or
compatible with the unit. Since other battery packs have different
specifications, they may be incompatible with the unit, and may burst or
explode.
Never heat or disassemble the battery pack, as that could cause leakage
of alkaline solution. Never throw the battery pack into a fire, as that
could cause the battery pack to explode.
2) The power supply, FL inverter and other components carry high voltages.
If you need to turn on the power of a partially disassembled computer to
check its operation, be very careful not to touch connectors or
components, in order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
Also, do not disassemble individual components in first-level
maintenance.
WARNING: 1) Turn off the power and disconnect the AC adaptor from the power source,
to avoid exposure to electric shock.
2) Batteries in the computer retain an electrical charge, so there is danger
of electrical shock even when the computer is disconnected from an AC
power source. Remove any metal jewelry or accessories such as
necklaces, bracelets or rings, in order to reduce the risk of electric shock.
Never work with wet or damp hands.
3) Be careful of edges and corners as these may cut.
CAUTION: 1) When you change a component, be sure the replacement component
meets the required specifications. Never use foreign parts, to avoid any
risk of damage to the computer.
2) To avoid any risk of short-circuit, fire or other internal damage, never
allow any metal objects such as screws or paper clips to fall into the unit.
Be sure to replace screws with the same size as those removed. Make
sure all screws are securely fastened. Loose screws can cause short
circuits, resulting in heat, smoke or fire.
3) Before lifting out an FRU or other component, make sure all cables to the
component have been disconnected, in order to reduce the risk of
accidental electric shock.
4) If you use AC power, be sure to use the cable that came with the
computer or one recommended by Toshiba.
5) Make sure that all replacement components meet the specifications for
the computer and that all cables and connectors are securely fastened, in
order to avoid the risk of electric shock.
6) Some parts inside the computer, such as the CPU and cooling module,
become very hot during operation. Conduct repair work after they have
cooled. Be careful around the CPU and cooling module to avoid burns.
4-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
Before You Begin
Look over the procedures in this section before you begin disassembling the computer.
Familiarize yourself with the disassembly and reassembly steps. Begin each procedure by
removing the AC adapter and the battery pack as instructed in this section:
1. Do not disassemble the computer unless it is operating abnormally.
2. Use only the correct and approved tools.
3. Make sure the working environment is free from the following elements whether you
are using or storing the computer.
• Dust and contaminates
• Static electricity
• Extreme heat, cold and humidity
4. Make sure the FRU you are replacing is causing the abnormal operation by
performing the necessary diagnostics tests described in this manual.
5. Do not perform any operations that are not necessary and use only the described
procedures for disassembling and installing FRUs in the computer.
6. After removing parts from the computer, place them in a safe place away from the
computer so they will not be damaged and will not interfere with your work.
7. You will remove and replace many screws when you disassemble the computer.
When you remove screws, make sure they are placed in a safe place and identified
with the correct parts.
8. When assembling the computer make sure you use the correct screws to secure the
various pieces in place. Screw sizes are listed in their corresponding figures.
9. The computer contains many sharp edges and corners, so be careful not to injure
yourself.
10. After you have replaced an FRU, make sure the computer is functioning properly by
performing the appropriate test on the FRU you have fixed or replaced.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 General
4 Replacement Procedures
Disassembly Procedures
The computer has two basic types of cable connectors:
• Pressure Plate Connectors
• Coaxial Cable Connectors
• Normal Pin Connectors
To disconnect a Pressure Plate connector, lift up the tabs on either side of the connector’s
plastic pressure plate and slide the cable out of the connector. To connect the cable to a
Pressure Plate connector, make sure the pressure plate is fully lifted and slide the cable into
the connector. Secure the cable in place by pushing the sides of the pressure plate down so
the plate is flush with the sides of the connector. Gently pull on the cable to make sure the
cable is secure. If you pull out the connector, connect it again making sure the connector’s
pressure plate is fully lifted when you insert the cable.
Coaxial cables should be disconnected with an antenna coaxial disconnector.
Standard pin connectors are used with all other cables. These connectors can be connected
and disconnected by simply pulling them apart or pushing them together.
Assembly Procedures
After you have disassembled the computer and fixed or repaired the problem that was causing
the computer to operate abnormally, you will need to reassemble the computer.
Install all the removed FRUs following the steps described in the corresponding sections in
this chapter.
While assembling the computer, remember the following general points:
• Take your time, making sure you follow the instructions closely. Most problems
arise when you get in a hurry assembling the computer.
• Make sure all cables and connectors are securely fastened.
• Before securing the FRU or other parts, make sure that screws or the FRU will
pinch no cables.
• Check that all latches are closed securely in place.
• Make sure all the correct screws are used to secure all FRUs. Using the wrong
screw can either damage the threads on the screw or the head of the screw and may
prevent proper seating of an FRU.
4-4
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
After installing an FRU in the computer, confirm that the FRU and the computer are
functioning properly.
Tools and Equipment
The use of Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) equipment is very important for your safety and the
safety of those around you. Proper use of these devices will increase the success rate of your
repairs and lower the cost for damaged or destroyed parts. The following equipment is
necessary to disassemble and reassemble the computer:
• One M1.4, point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and replace screws
• One M2, point size 0 Phillips screwdriver to remove and replace screws
• One M2.5/M3, point size 1 Phillips screwdriver to remove and replace screws
• One M5 hexagonal screwdriver
• Tweezers, to lift out screws that you cannot grasp with your fingers
• ESD mats for the floor and the table you are working on
• An ESD wrist strap or heel grounder
• Anti-static carpeting or flooring
• Air ionizers in highly static sensitive areas
• Antenna coaxial cable disconnector
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 General
4 Replacement Procedures
Screw Tightening Torque
When you fasten screws, be sure to follow the torque list below.
CAUTION: Overtightening can damage components and screws; undertightening can
result in electrical shorts or other damage if screws or components come
loose.
NOTE: Toshiba recommends that you use an electric screwdriver for quick and easy
operations.
• M1.4 (1.4mm)
• M2.0 (2.0mm)
• M2.5 (2.5mm)
• M3.0 (3.0mm)
0.078 N·m (0.8 kgf·cm)
0.167 N·m (1.7 kgf·cm)
0.294 N·m (3.0 kgf·cm)
0.549 N·m (5.6 kgf·cm)
NOTE: The computer contains several flat head screws. These screws have less contact
area with the screwdriver, so be careful to press firmly enough to prevent the
screwdriver from slipping out and damaging the screw head.
4-6
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.1 General
Color of Screw Shaft
To avoid mistakes on the screw length, screw shafts are colored as follows:
‰ Even number length screw:
‰ Odd number length screw:
‰ Special length screw:
brown
white
blue
Screws whose lengths are indicated to one or more decimal places such as 2.5 mm or
2.8 mm.
Marking of Screws on the Computer Body
To make maintenance of the computer easier, markings of the kinds of the screws including
the types and lengths of the screws are indicated on the computer body.
Kind of screws
Symbol
‰ BIND screw
B
F
‰ FLAT HEAD screw
‰ SUPER FLAT HEAD screw
‰ TAPPING screw
S
T
U
‰ Other screws
(Unique screws, STUD, etc.)
Examples:
‰ 6 mm BIND screw
‰ 12 mm BIND screw
‰ 5 mm FLAT HEAD screw
B6
B12
F5
‰ (Indicates the screwed length in round number regardless the length of the stud.)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 Battery pack
4 Replacement Procedures
4.2 Battery pack
Removing the battery pack
To remove the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-1.
CAUTION: When handling battery packs, be careful not to short circuit the terminals.
Also do not drop, hit or apply impact; do not scratch, break, twist or bend the
battery pack.
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC cable and other external devices from the computer.
3. Turn the computer face down.
4. Release the battery lock by sliding the lock toward the arrow direction.
5. While sliding the battery release latch, pull out the battery pack to the arrow
direction.
Battery lock
Battery pack
Battery release latch
Figure 4-1 Removing the Battery pack
NOTE: Dispose of the used battery pack in accordance with the laws and ordinances of
your local authority.
4-8
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.2 Battery pack
Installing the battery pack
To install the battery pack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-1.
CAUTION: The battery pack is a lithium ion battery, which can explode if not properly
replaced, used, handled or disposed of. For environmental reasons, collect
the spent battery packs. Use only batteries recommended by Toshiba as
replacements.
NOTE: Check the battery's terminals visually. If they are dirty, wipe them clean with a
dry cloth.
1. Turn off the computer.
2. Disconnect the AC cable and other external devices from the computer.
3. Push the battery pack into the battery slot. Make sure the battery pack is installed
securely.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 PC card/SD card/CF card
4 Replacement Procedures
4.3 PC card/SD card/CF card
4.3.1 PC card
Removing a PC card
To remove a PC card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-2.
CAUTION: Before you remove a PC card, refer to the card's documentation and your
operating system documentation for proper procedures and precautions.
1. Push the eject button. It will pop out when you release it. Then press once more the
eject button to eject a PC card.
2. Grasp a PC card and pull it out.
Eject button
PC card
Figure 4-2 Removing a PC card
Installing a PC card
To install a PC card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-2.
1. Make sure the eject button does not stick out.
2. Insert a PC card and press it until it is securely connected.
4-10
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.3 PC card/SD card/CF card
4.3.2 SD card
Removing a SD card
To remove a SD card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-3.
CAUTION: Before you remove a SD card, refer to the card's documentation and to your
operating system documentation for proper procedures and precautions.
1. Push a SD card. It will pop out partly when you release, so pull out the card.
SD card
Figure 4-3 Removing a SD card
Installing a SD Card
To install a SD card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-3.
1. Insert a SD card and press it until it is securely connected.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 PC card/SD card/CF card
4 Replacement Procedures
4.3.3 CF card
Removing a CF card
To remove a CF card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-4.
CAUTION: Before you remove a CF card, refer to the card's documentation and your
operating system documentation for proper procedures and precautions.
1. Push the eject button. It will pop out when you release it. Then press once more the
eject button to eject a CF card.
2. Grasp a CF card and pull it out.
Eject button
CF card
Figure 4-4 Removing a CF card
4-12
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.3 PC card/SD card/CF card
Installing a CF card
To install a CF card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-5 and 4-6.
1. Push the eject button. It will pop out when you release it. Then press once more the
eject button to eject the dummy card.
Eject button
Dummy card
Figure 4-5 Removing the dummy card
2. Insert a CF card and press it until it is securely connected.
CF card
Figure 4-6 Inserting a CF card
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 HDD
4 Replacement Procedures
4.4 HDD
Removing the HDD
To remove HDD, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-7 and 4-8.
CAUTION: When handling the HDD, do not press the HDD from the top and bottom
surface. Pressing HDD may causes data and device destruction.
1. Turn the computer upside down.
2. Loosen the following screw (with e-ring) and remove the HDD slot cover.
3. Lift up the HDD assembly from screw hole side.
4. Disconnect the HDD assembly carefully from the connector of the HDD FPC.
HDD slot cover
Screw (e-ring)
HDD assembly
HDD FPC
Figure 4-7 Removing the HDD assembly
4-14
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.4 HDD
5. Remove the HDD cushion rubbers from the both sides of HDD assembly.
6. Remove the following screws and slide out the HDD from the HDD bracket.
‰ M3.0×4.0S
FLAT HEAD screw
×4
NOTE: When removing the HDD bracket, be sure to remove the screws in the reverse
order of the number marked on the holder (4→3→2→1).
HDD cushion rubber
HDD bracket
M3.0x4.0S FLAT BIND
HDD
M3.0x4.0S FLAT BIND
HDD cushion rubber
Figure 4-8 Removing the HDD
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 HDD
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the HDD
To install the HDD, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-7 and 4-8.
1. Install a HDD into the HDD bracket and secure it with the following screws.
‰ M3.0×4.0S
FLAT HEAD screw
×4
NOTE: When installing the HDD bracket, be sure to secure the screws in the order of the
number marked on the holder (1→2→3→4).
2. Cover the HDD cushion rubbers to the both sides of HDD assembly.
3. Connect the HDD assembly to the connector of the HDD FPC.
4. Seat the HDD assembly in the slot of the computer.
NOTE: When installing the HDD assembly to the slot, make sure that the printed
character "UP" on the HDD cushion rubber is not seen from the slot.
5. Install the HDD slot cover and secure it with the screw (with e-ring).
4-16
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.5 Memory module
4.5 Memory module
CAUTION: The power of the computer must be turned off when you remove the memory
module. Removing a memory module with the power on risks damaging the
module or the computer itself.
Do not touch the memory module terminals. Any dirt on the terminals may
cause memory access problems.
Never press hard or bend the memory module.
Removing a memory module
To remove a memory module, confirm that the computer is in boot mode. Then perform the
following procedures and refer to figure 4-9.
1. Turn the computer upside down.
2. Loosen the screw (with e-ring) and remove the memory slot cover.
3. Remove the memory slot cover.
4. Open the left and right latches and remove a memory module from the connector
CN1440 on the system board.
Memory slot cover
CN1440
Screw (e-ring)
Memory module
Figure 4-9 Removing a memory module
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5 Memory module
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing a memory module
To install a memory module, confirm that the computer is in boot mode. Then follow the
steps below and refer to figures 4-9.
1. Insert a memory module into the connector CN1440 of the system board slantwise
and press it to connect firmly.
CAUTION: The power must be turned off when you insert a memory module. Inserting a
memory module with the power on might damage the module or the computer
itself.
Never press hard or bend a memory module.
2. Install the memory slot cover and secure it with the screw (with e-ring).
3. When the power of the computer is turned on, the computer checks automatically the
memory size. Confirm that a new memory module is detected correctly.
4. If the memory is not detected, check that it is connected correctly.
4-18
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.6 Keyboard
4.6 Keyboard
Removing the Keyboard
To remove the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-10 to 4-12.
CAUTION: When removing the keyboard, hold the edge of it. Do not touch the key top.
Otherwise, the key top may drop.
1. Remove the following screw on the bottom.
‰ M2.0×6.0B BIND screw
×1
M2.0x6.0B BIND
Figure 4-10 Removing the screw (fixing keyboard)
2. Turn the computer face up and open the display.
3. Lifting up the speaker cover (S) from the slit side and remove it.
4. Slide the speaker cover (L) toward the arrow direction and remove it.
5. Remove the following screws securing the keyboard.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
or
×2
‰ M2.0×4.0B LH STICK
×1 (Left side)
M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1 (Right side)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 Keyboard
4 Replacement Procedures
Speaker cover (L)
Slit
Speaker cover (s)
M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
or
M2.0x4.0B
LH STICK
Figure 4-11 Removing the speaker covers
6. Lift the upper side of the keyboard and turn it’s face down on the palm rest.
7. Peel off the cover tape sticking over the slit for keyboard flexible cable.
8. Turning up the cover sheet, disconnect the keyboard flexible cable from the
connector CN3230 on the system board.
9. Pull out the keyboard flexible cable through the slit and remove the keyboard.
Cover tape
Cover sheet
Slit
CN3230
Keyboard
Figure 4-12 Removing the keyboard
4-20
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.6 Keyboard
Installing the Keyboard
To install the keyboard, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-10 to 4-12.
1. Place the keyboard face down on the palm rest and connect the keyboard flexible
cable to the connector CN3230 on the system board after passing the cable through
the slit of cover sheet.
2. Stick the cover tape over the slit of cover sheet.
CAUTION: Cover tape can not be reused. Be sure to use a new cover tape when
replacing.
3. Turn the keyboard face up and put it on the computer. Make sure that there is no gap
between the keyboard and the computer.
4. Secure the keyboard with the following screws.
CAUTION: Be sure to screw the LH STICK in the left side, if the LH STICK is used for
the computer, when securing the keyboard.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
or
×2
‰ M2.0×4.0B LH STICK
×1 (Left side)
M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1 (Right side)
5. Slide and install the speaker cover (L) to the computer.
CAUTION: When installing the speaker cover (L), make sure that speaker cable and
wireless LAN antenna cables are not come out from the guide. And also, be
careful not to catch the cables between cover assembly and speaker cover
(L).
6. Install the speaker cover (S) to the computer.
7. Turn the computer upside down and secure the keyboard with the following screw on
the bottom.
‰ M2.0×6.0B BIND screw
×1
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7 Switch membrane
4 Replacement Procedures
4.7 Switch membrane
Removing the switch membrane
To remove the switch membrane, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-13.
1. Remove the following screw and remove the switch cover.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
2. Disconnect the switch membrane from the connector CN3270 on the system board.
3. Remove the following screws and remove the switch membrane.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×2
M2.0x3.0S S-THIN FLAT BIND
Switch cover
M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
CN3270
Switch membrane
Figure 4-13 Removing the switch membrane
4-22
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.7 Switch membrane
Installing the switch membrane
To install the switch membrane, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-13.
1. Slide and set the switch membrane along the guide and secure it with the following
screws.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×2
2. Connect the switch membrane to the connector CN3270 on the system board.
CAUTION: When connecting the switch membrane, be careful not to connect it slantwise
and be sure to lock the connector.
3. Install the switch cover and secure it with the following screw.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
CAUTION: When installing the switch cover, put the tab of switch membrane into the
switch cover.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.8 Bluetooth
4 Replacement Procedures
4.8 Bluetooth
Removing a Bluetooth
To remove a bluetooth, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-14.
1. Remove the following screw securing a bluetooth module.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
2. Disconnect the blutooth flat cable from both a bluetooth module and connector
CN4400 on the system board.
3. Disconnect the bluetooth antenna cable from a bluetooth module.
M2.0x3.0S S-THIN FLAT BIND
Bluetooth module
Bluetooth flat cable
Bluetooth antenna cable
CN4400
Figure 4-14 Removing a bluetooth module
Installing a Bluetooth
To install a bluetooth, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-14.
1. Connect the bluetooth antenna cable to the connector on a bluetooth module
2. Connect the bluetooth flat cable to both a bluetooth module and the connector
CN4400 on the system board.
3. Install a bluetooth module along the guide and secure it with the following screw.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
4-24
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.9 Optical drive
4.9
Optical drive
Removing an optical drive
To remove an optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-15 and 4-16.
1. Turn over the computer and remove the following screws securing an optical drive
assembly.
‰ M2.5×10.0B FLAT BIND screw
×1
‰ M2.0×4.0B BIND screw
×1
2. Push out an optical drive assembly by pressing it from the slot and remove it.
Optical drive
M2.5x4.0B BIND
M2.5x10.0B
FLAT BIND
Slot
Figure 4-15 Removing an optical drive assembly
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.9 Optical drive
4 Replacement Procedures
3. Remove the following screws securing the rear bracket and remove it from an
optical drive assembly.
‰ Unique screw Stepping screw
×2
4. Remove the following screw securing the side bracket and remove it from an optical
drive assembly.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
Rear bracket
M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
Stepping screw
Side bracket
Fitting this dent
to the side bracket
Figure 4-16 Removing the brackets
4-26
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.9 Optical drive
Installing an optical drive
To install an optical drive, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-15 to 4-16.
1. Install the side bracket to the optical drive assembly and secure it with the following
screw.
‰ M2.0×3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
2. Fitting the dent to the side bracket, install the rear bracket to an optical drive
assembly and secure it with the following screws.
‰ Unique screw Stepping screw
×2
3. Insert an optical drive assembly into the optical drive slot carefully.
CAUTION: When inserting an optical drive, be sure to turn the computer face up. Also,
be careful not to insert the drive upside down.
4. Turn over the computer and secure an optical drive with the following screws.
‰ M2.5×10.0B FLAT BIND screw
×1
‰ M2.0×4.0B BIND screw
×1
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.10 Display assembly
4 Replacement Procedures
4
Replacement Procedures
4.10 Display assembly
Removing the display assembly
To remove the display assembly, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-17 to 4-21.
1. Close the display and turn the computer face down.
2. Remove the following screws on the bottom.
‰ M2.0×6.0B BIND screw
×9 (Described "6" in the figure)
‰ M2.0×4.0B BIND screw
×1 (Described "4" in the figure)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(6)
(4)
(6)
Figure 4-17 Removing the screws (bottom)
4-28
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.10 Display assembly
3. Open the display and remove the following screw securing the GND cable and cover
assembly.
‰ M2.0×6.0B BIND screw
×1
4. Remove the following screws securing the cover assembly.
‰ M2.0×6.0B BIND screw
×2
5. Disconnect the LCD harness from the connector CN5600 on the system board.
6. Disconnect the inverter harness form the connector CN8812 on the system board.
7. Disconnect the LAN harness from the connector CN4100 on the system board.
8. Disconnect the speaker cable from the connector CN6180 on the system board.
9. Disconnect the touch pad cable from the connector CN3240 on the system board.
LAN harness
Inverter harness
M2.0x6.0B BIND
Speaker cable
(Connected to CN6180)
M2.0x6.0B BIND
(securing with
GND cable)
M2.0x6.0B BIND
LCD harness
(Connected to CN4100)
Touch pad cable
(Connected to CN3240)
Figure 4-18 Removing the screws and cables
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.10 Display assembly
4 Replacement Procedures
10. Peel off the glass tape 1 and pull out the bluetooth antenna cable from the guide of
cover assembly.
11. Turn up the insulators 1 and pull out the wireless LAN antenna cables from the
guide of cover assembly.
Insulator 1
Glass tape 1
Wireless LAN
antenna cable
Bluetooth antenna cable
Figure 4-19 Removing the antenna cables
4-30
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.10 Display assembly
12. Remove the following screws securing the hinge caps and remove the hinge caps.
‰ M2.5x8.0B FLAT BIND screw
×2
13. Remove the following screws securing the hinges and remove the hinges.
‰ M2.5x8.0B FLAT BIND screw
×2
14. Part the display assembly from the base assembly and put it apart with antenna
cables connected between both assemblies.
Display assembly
M2.5x8.0B FLAT BIND
[with Locktight]
Hinge cap
M2.5x8.0B
FLAT BIND
M2.5x8.0B FLAT BIND
[with Locktight]
Hinge
M2.5x8.0B FLAT BIND
Base assembly
Hinge cap
Figure 4-20 Removing the display assembly
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.10 Display assembly
4 Replacement Procedures
15. While lifting up the cover assembly slightly, peel off the glass tape 2 on the system
board.
16. Turn up the insulator 2 on the system board and disconnect the wireless LAN
antenna cables from the wireless LAN card.
CAUTION: When turning up the insulator 2, be careful not to break the SD card slot
cover.
17. Pull out the wireless LAN antenna cables from the slot of cover assembly.
18. Pull out the LAN harness from the slot of cover assembly.
19. Part the cover assembly from the base assembly.
Cover assembly
LAN harness
Insulator 2
Glass tape 2
Wireless LAN
antenna cables
Base assembly
Lever portion of CF card slot cover
Figure 4-21 Removing the cover assembly
4-32
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.10 Display assembly
Installing the display assembly
To install the cover, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-17 to 4-21.
1. Passing the wireless LAN antenna cables through the slot of cover assembly, connect
the wireless LAN antenna cables to the connectors on the wireless LAN card.
CAUTION: Be sure to connect the wireless LAN antenna cables to the proper connectors
on the wireless LAN card (White cable to MAIN and Black cable to AUX).
2. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables on the system board and secure them with
the insulator 2.
CAUTION: (1) Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables away from the lever portion of
CF card slot cover. And be sure to check if the cables are not caught in the
CF card slot lever.
(2) When sticking the insulator 2, be careful not to break the SD card slot.
3. Secure the wireless LAN antenna cables with the glass tape 2.
4. Passing the LAN harness through the slot of cover assembly, install the cover
assembly to the base assembly.
5. Install the display assembly to the base assembly and secure the hinges with the
following screws.
‰ M2.5x8.0B FLAT HEAD
×2
CAUTION: When installing the display assembly, be sure to apply Locktight-425 or
Locktight-7400 to the screws securing the hinges.
6. Install the hinge caps and secure them with the following screws.
‰ M2.5x8.0B FLAT HEAD
×2
7. Connect the LAN harness to the connector CN4100 on the system board.
8. Connect the LCD harness to the connector CN5600 on the system board.
CAUTION: When connecting the LAN harness, be careful not to arrange the harness
under the insulator.
9. Connect the inverter harness to the connector CN8812 on the system board.
10. Connect the speaker cables to the connector CN6180 on the system board.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.10 Display assembly
4 Replacement Procedures
11. Connect the touch pad cable to the connector CN3240 on the system board.
12. Arrange the wireless LAN antenna cables along the guide of base assembly and
secure them with insulators 1.
CAUTION: When arranging the wireless LAN antenna cables, make sure wireless LAN
antenna cables are not come out from the guide.
13. Arrange the bluetooth antenna cable along the guide of base assembly and secure all
antenna cables with glass tape 1.
CAUTION: When arranging the bluetooth antenna cable, make sure bluetoooth antenna
cable is not come out from the guide.
14. Secure the cover assembly and GND cable with the following screw.
‰ M2.0x6.0B BIND screw
×1
NOTE: Be sure to secure the GND cable with the caulked side upward.
15. Secure the cover assembly with the following screws.
‰ M2.0x6.0B BIND screw
×2
16. Turn the computer face down and secure the cover assembly with the following
screws from the bottom.
‰ M2.0×6.0B BIND screw
×9 (Described "6" in the figure)
‰ M2.0×4.0B BIND screw
×1 (Described "4" in the figure)
4-34
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.11 Speaker
4.11 Speaker
Removing the speaker
To remove the speaker, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-22.
1. Pull out the speaker from the slot of cover assembly.
2. Peeling off the insulators, pull out the speaker cables from the guide of cover
assembly.
Insulator
Insulator
Speaker
Speaker
Figure 4-22 Removing the speaker
Installing the speaker
To install the speaker, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-22.
1. Install the speaker to the slot of cover assembly.
2. Arrange the speaker cable along the guide and secure them with insulators.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.12 Touch Pad
4 Replacement Procedures
4.12 Touch Pad
Removing the Touch Pad
To remove the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-23 and 4-24.
1. Peel off the adhered portion of cover sheet and remove the cover sheet from the
cover assembly.
Adhered portion
Cover sheet
Figure 4-23 Peeling off the cover sheet
2. Remove the pad cover while releasing the latches.
3. Remove the following screws securing the touch pad.
‰ M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×2
4. Remove the touch pad while peeling off the adhered portion from cover assembly.
4-36
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.12 Touch Pad
Pad cover
Touch pad
M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
Figure 4-24 Removing the touch pad
Installing the Touch Pad
To install the touch pad, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-23 and 4-24.
1. Arranging the touch pad cable, stick the touch pad in place and secure it with
following screws.
‰ M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×2
2. Install the pad cover while locking latches.
3. Stick the cover sheet along the guide of cover assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the cover sheet. Be sure to use a new cover sheet after peeling
off the cover sheet from the cover assembly.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.13 Wireless LAN card
4 Replacement Procedures
4.13 Wireless LAN card
Removing the wireless LAN card
To remove the wireless LAN card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-25.
1. Open the left and right latches and remove the wireless LAN card from the
connector CN2200 on the system board.
Latch
CN2200
Latch
Wireless LAN card
Figure 4-25 Removing the wireless LAN card
Installing the wireless LAN card
To install the wireless LAN card, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-25.
1. Insert the wireless LAN card into the connector CN2200 of the system board
slantwise and press it to connect firmly.
4-38
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.14 RTC battery
4.14 RTC battery
Removing the RTC battery
To remove the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-26.
1. Pull out the RTC battery from the slot of base assembly.
2. Disconnect the RTC battery cable from the connector CN8760 on the system board.
3. Pull out the spacer from the slot.
RTC battery
CN8760
Spacer
Figure 4-26 Removing the RTC battery
Installing the RTC battery
To install the RTC battery, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-26.
1. Connect the RTC battery cable to the connector CN8760 on the system board.
2. Insert the RTC battery into the slot of base assembly.
3. Set the spacer into the slot.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.15 LAN jack
4 Replacement Procedures
4.15 LAN jack
Removing the LAN jack
To remove the LAN jack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-27.
1. Open the insulator covering the core portion of LAN harness.
2. Lift the LAN jack straight up and remove it from the base assembly.
Core
LAN jack
Insulator
Figure 4-27 Removing the LAN jack
Installing the LAN jack
To install the LAN jack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-27.
1. Install the LAN jack to the slot of base assembly.
2. Cover the core portion of LAN harness with insulator.
4-40
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.16 System board
4.16 System board
CAUTION: 1. When handling the system board, hold the edges.
2. When replacing with a new system board, be sure to follow the procedures
below.
(1) Execute the subtest03 DMI information save of 3.3 Setting of the
hardware configuration in Chapter 3.
(2) Copy the DMI data to a new system board by executing subtest04 DMI
information recovery and subtest08 System configuration display.
Removing the system board
To remove the system board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-28.
1. While pulling out the DC-IN jack and modem jack from the base assembly, lift up
the system board and remove it toward the arrow direction.
System board
DC-IN jack
Modem jack
Sound I/F side
Slot portion
Figure 4-28 Removing the system board
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.16 System board
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the system board
To install the system board, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-28.
1. While fitting the DC-IN jack and modem jack into the slot of base assembly, install
the system board from the sound I/F side.
NOTE: After installing the system board to the base assembly, put the microphone cable
into the slot.
4-42
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.17 Microphone
4.17 Microphone
Removing the microphone
To remove the microphone, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-29.
1. Disconnect the microphone cable from the connector CN6050 on the system board.
2. Remove the microphone from the system board.
Microphone
CN6050
Figure 4-29 Removing the microphone
Installing the microphone
To install the microphone, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-29.
1. Insert the edge of the microphone into the hole of system board.
2. Pull the edge of microphone from the back of the system board and secure it to the
system board.
3. Connect the microphone cable to the connector CN6050 on the system board.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.18 Fan
4 Replacement Procedures
4.18 Fan
Removing the fan
To remove the fan, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-30.
1. Disconnect the fan cable from the connector CN8770 on the system board.
2. Remove the following screws and remove the fan.
‰ M2.0x4.0B BIND screw
M2.0x4.0B BIND
×2
C9013 & C9014
Fan
CN8770
Figure 4-30 Removing the fan
Installing the fan
To install the fan, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-30.
1. Install the fan and secure it with the following screws.
‰ M2.0x4.0B BIND screw
×2
2. Connect the fan cable to the connector CN8770 on the system board.
CAUTION: Arrange the fan cable away from C9013 and C9014 on the system board.
4-44
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.19 Cooling fin
4.19 Cooling fin
Removing the cooling fin
To remove the cooling fin, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-31.
1. Remove the following screws and cooling fin from the system board.
‰ M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×2
NOTE: When removing the cooling fin, be sure to remove the screws in the reverse
order of the number marked on the cooling fin (2→1).
M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
Cooling fin
Figure 4-31 Removing the cooling fin
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.19 Cooling fin
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the cooling fin
To install the cooling fin, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-31 and 4-32.
1. If there is already silicon grease on the CPU and cooling fin, clean them with a cloth.
2. Using a special applicator, apply silicon grease so that the CPU chip on the CPU is
completely covered.
Silicon grease
CPU
Figure 4-32 Applying silicon grease
3. Install the cooling fin and secure it with the following screws.
‰ M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×2
NOTE: When installing the cooling fin, be sure to install the screws in the order of the
number marked on the cooling fin (1→2).
4-46
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.20 HDD FPC
4.20 HDD FPC
Removing the HDD FPC
To remove the HDD FPC, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-33.
1. Raise the slider of connector CN1800 by lifting it up toward the arrow direction.
2. Remove the HDD FPC from the system board.
HDD FPC
Slider
CN1800
Figure 4-33 Removing the HDD FPC
Installing the HDD FPC
To install the HDD FPC, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-33.
1. Connect the HDD FPC to the connector CN1800 on the system board.
2. Push down the slider of connector and secure the lock.
CAUTION: To lock the connector by slider, follow the procedures below.
(1). Push down the slider of connector from the top by pressing whole top
surface.
(2). Secure the lock by pushing down the slider completely.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.21 Modem
4 Replacement Procedures
4.21 Modem
Removing the modem
To remove the modem, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-34 and 4-35.
1. Remove the following screws securing the MDC.
‰ M2.0x4.0Z
BIND screw
×2
2. Disconnect the MDC from the connector CN3000 on the system board by lifting it
straight up.
3. Disconnect the modem cable from the connector of the MDC.
M2.0x4.0Z BIND
MDC
CN3000
Modem cable
Figure 4-34 Removing the MDC
4. Disconnect the modem cable from the connector CN3001 on the system board.
5. Turning up the insulators 1 covering the modem cable, pull out the modem cable.
6. Opening the insulator 2 covering the core of modem cable, pull out the modem cable
from the slit of insulator and remove it from the system board.
4-48
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.21 Modem
Insulators 1
Core
Modem jack
CN3001
Insulator 2
Slit
Figure 4-35 Removing the modem jack
Installing the modem jack
To install the modem jack, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-34 and 4-35.
1. Set the modem jack to the system board and cover the core of modem cable with
insulator 2.
2. Passing the modem cable through the slits, arrange the modem cable and connect it to
the connector CN3001 on the system board.
3. Secure the modem cable with the insulator 1.
4. Connect the modem cable to the connector of the MDC.
5. Connect the MDC straight down to the connector CN3000 on the system board.
6. Secure the MDC with the following screws.
‰ M2.0x4.0Z
BIND screw
×2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.22 DC-IN jack
4 Replacement Procedures
4.22 DC-IN jack
Removing the DC-IN jack
To remove the DC-IN jack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-36.
1. Disconnect the DC-IN harness from the connector CN8800 on the system board and
remove it.
DC-IN jack
CN8800
Figure 4-36 Removing the DC-IN jack
Installing the DC-IN jack
To install the DC-IN jack, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-36.
1. Connect the DC-IN harness to the connector CN8800 on the system board.
4-50
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.23 PC card slot cover
4.23 PC card slot cover
Removing the PC card slot cover
To remove the PC card slot cover, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-37.
1. Turning up the insulator, remove the following screws securing the PC card slot
cover.
‰ M2.0x4.0B FLAT BIND screw
×4
2. Release the hook and remove the PC card slot cover from the system board.
Hook
Insulator
M2.0x4.0S FLAT BIND
M2.0x4.0S FLAT BIND
Figure 4-37 Removing the PC card slot cover
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.23 PC card slot cover
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the PC card slot cover
To install the PC card slot cover, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-37.
1. While locking the hook of PC card slot cover, install the PC card slot cover.
2. Secure the PC card slot cover with following screws.
‰ M2.0x4.0B FLAT BIND screw
×4
3. Stick the insulator on the system board.
4-52
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.24 Display latch
4.24 Display latch
Removing the display latch
To remove the display latch, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-38 and 4-39.
1. Remove the following screws and remove the LED panel.
‰ M2.0x4.0B BIND screw
×4
2. Part the display latch assembly from the LED panel.
M2.0x4.0B BIND
LED panel
Display latch assembly
Figure 4-38 Removing the LED panel
3. Release the tabs and disassemble the display latch assembly.
Tab
Tab
Spring
Figure 4-39 Disassembling the display latch assembly
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.24 Display latch
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the display latch
To install the display latch, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-38 and 4-39.
1. Set the spring to the display latch assembly.
2. Lock the tabs and assemble the display latch assembly.
3. Installing the display latch assembly and LED panel to the base assembly, secure
them with the following screws.
‰ M2.0x4.0B BIND screw
×4
4-54
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.25 Battery lock/Battery latch
4.25 Battery lock/Battery latch
Removing the battery lock/battery latch
To remove the battery lock/battery latch, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-40.
1. Release the tabs and disassemble the battery lock.
2. Pull out the spring from the battery lock.
3. After turning up the insulator, disassemble the battery latch while releasing tab.
4. Pull out the spring from the battery latch.
Spring
[Battery latch]
[Battery lock]
Spring
Insulator
Tab
Tab
Figure 4-40 Removing the battery lock/battery latch
Installing the battery lock/battery latch
To install the battery lock/battery latch, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-40.
1. Set the spring to the battery latch.
2. Lock the tabs to the battery latch and assemble the battery latch.
3. Set the spring to the battery lock.
4. Lock the tab to the battery lock and assemble the battery lock.
5. Cover the battery lock with the insulator.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.26 LCD mask
4 Replacement Procedures
4.26 LCD mask
CAUTION: There is no bezel on the LCD. Be careful not to give mechanical stress to
the LCD in the work.
Never scratch the surface of the LCD.
Removing the LCD mask
To remove the LCD mask, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-41.
1. Remove three mask rubbers and the following screws.
‰ M2.0x4.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×2
2. Remove four mask seals and the following screws.
‰ M2.0x4.0S S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×2
3. Release the latches on the LCD mask and remove the LCD mask while inserting
your fingers between the LCD mask and LCD unit.
Mask rubber
M2.0x4.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
Mask seal
M2.0x4.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
M2.0x4.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND
Mask seal
Figure 4-41 Removing the LCD mask
4-56
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.26 LCD mask
Installing the LCD mask
To install the LCD mask, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-41.
1. Install the LCD mask while fitting the latches.
NOTE: Be careful not to catch the LCD harness, wireless LAN antenna cables and
bluetooth antenna cable between LCD mask and display cover.
When installing the LCD mask, make sure there is no gap between the LCD mask
and display cover.
2. Secure the LCD mask with the following screws.
‰ M2.0x4.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×4
3. Stick three mask rubbers to the LCD mask.
4. Stick four mask seals to the LCD mask.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.27 LCD unit/ FL inverter
4 Replacement Procedures
4.27 LCD unit/ FL inverter
Removing the LCD unit /FL Inverter
To remove the LCD unit/FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-42 and 4-
43.
1. Turning up the insulator in order (1→2), gently remove the FL inverter upward
while peeling off the double-sided tape on the bottom.
2. Remove the following screw and GND cable from the display assembly.
‰ M2.0x4.0B FLAT BIND screw
×1
3. Lift up the LCD unit carefully.
4. Peel off the copper tape at the connector on the back of LCD unit and disconnect the
LCD harness from the LCD unit.
5. Remove the LDC unit from the LCD cover.
6. Remove the FL inverter from the LCD cover while peeling off the double-sided tape.
CAUTION: The removed FL inverter is not reusable. Therefore when installing the FL
inverter, it must be a new one.
7. Disconnect the LCD harness and HV cable from the FL inverter.
4-58
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.27 LCD unit/ FL inverter
M2.0x4.0B FLAT BIND
GND cable
Insulator 1
LCD unit
Insulator 2
HV cable
FL inverter
LCD harness
LCD harness
Copper tape
Figure 4-42 Removing the LCD unit
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.27 LCD unit/ FL inverter
4 Replacement Procedures
8. Removing the following screw, remove the GND cable and washer from the LCD
unit.
‰ M1.4x2.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
CAUTION: GND cable is removed from LCD unit only when LCD unit must be replaced.
LCD unit
GND cable
Washer
Caulking side
M1.4x2.0S S-THIN FLAT BIND
Figure 4-43 Removing the GND cable
4-60
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.27 LCD unit/ FL inverter
Installing the LCD unit /FL Inverter
To install the LCD unit/FL inverter, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-42, 4-43.
1. Secure the GND cable and washer to the LCD unit with the following screw.
‰ M1.4x2.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
NOTE: Be sure to secure the GND cable with the caulking side outward.
2. Connect the LCD harness to the connector on the back of LCD unit and stick the
copper tape over the connector.
NOTE: (1) Stick the copper tape by fitting its edge to the corner of LCD unit connector.
(2) Make sure that there is no floating and coming-off of copper tape and that
the copper tape is stuck over the LCD unit connector, harness connector and
LCD harness.
Harness connector
LCD unit connector
LCD harness
Fitting the edge to the
corner of connector
Copper tape
3. Place the LCD unit along the guide of LCD cover.
4. Secure the GND cable with the following screw.
‰ M2.0x4.0B FLAT BIND screw
×1
NOTE: Be sure to secure the GND cable with the caulking side upward.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.27 LCD unit/ FL inverter
4 Replacement Procedures
5. Connect the LCD harness and the HV cable to the FL inverter.
CAUTION: The FL inverter once removed from the computer is not reusable. When
installing the FL inverter, use always a new one.
6. Place the FL inverter on the display cover with double-sided tape.
NOTE: (1) Install the FL inverter to set the edge of LCD harness connector in the
position of rib on the LCD cover.
(2) Make sure the harness is not stretched after connecting.
LCD harness
Rib on the LCD cover
7. Bend the insulator in order (2→1) and stick the insulator 1 on the FL inverter.
4-62
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.28 LCD harness
4.28 LCD harness
Removing the LCD harness
To remove the LCD harness, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-44.
1. Remove the following screw securing the LCD harness holder.
‰ M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
2. After releasing the LCD harness holder from the hook, remove the LCD harness
holder from the LCD cover.
3. Remove the LCD harness from the LCD cover.
Hook
M2.0x3.0S S-THIN FLAT BIND
LCD harness
LCD harness holder
Figure 4-44 Removing the LCD harness
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.28 LCD harness
4 Replacement Procedures
Installing the LCD harness
To install the LCD harness, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-44.
1. Arrange the LCD harness along the guide of LCD cover.
NOTE: Arrange the LCD harness to set the marking portion of LCD harness in the
position of gateway of LCD cover.
Be careful not to
catch the harness
Set the marking portion in the position
of the gateway of LCD cover
2. Install the LCD harness holder while locking the hook portion and secure it with the
following screw.
‰ M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
CAUTION: When installing the LCD harness holder, be careful not to catch the LCD
harness in LCD harness holder.
4-64
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.29 Wireless antennas /Front panel
4.29 Wireless antennas /Front panel
Removing the wireless antennas / Front panel
To remove the wireless antennas / front panel, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-
45 and 4-46.
1. Peel off six acetate tapes on the antenna cables.
2. Turn up the two insulators securing the wireless LAN antenna cables.
3. While peeling off the wireless antennas, remove the wireless LAN antennas and
bluetooth antenna from LCD cover by pulling it through the guide slit.
Wireless LAN
Bluetooth antenna Wireless LAN
antenna (AUX)
antenna (MAIN)
Insulator
Insulator
Acetate tape
Acetate tape
Figure 4-45 Removing the wireless antennas
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.29 Wireless antennas /Front panel
4 Replacement Procedures
4. Remove the following screw and front panel while releasing latches.
‰ M2.0x3.0S S-THIN FLAT BIND screw ×1
M2.0x3.0 S-THIN FLAT BIND
Front panel
Figure 4-46 Removing the front panel
Installing the wireless antennas / Front panel
To install the wireless antennas / Front panel, follow the steps below and refer to figure 4-45
and 4-46.
1. Install the front panel and secure it with the following screw.
‰ M2.0x3.0S
S-THIN FLAT BIND screw
×1
2. Passing wireless LAN antennas through the guide slit, stick them on the LCD cover.
3. Passing bluetooth antenna through the guide slit, stick it on the LCD cover.
4. Fix wireless LAN antenna cables with two insulators on both sides.
5. Arrange the wireless antenna cables on the LCD cover and fix them with six acetate
tapes.
4-66
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Replacement Procedures
4.30 Hinge
4.30 Hinge
Removing the hinge
To remove the hinge, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-47.
1. Remove the following screws securing the both sides of hinges and remove them.
‰ M2.5x4.0B FLAT BIND screw
M2.5x4.0B FLAT BIND
×4
M2.5x4.0B FLAT BIND
[with Locktight]
[With Locktight]
Hinge
Hinge
Figure 4-47 Removing the Hinge
Installing the hinge
To install the hinge, follow the steps below and refer to figures 4-47.
1. Install both sides of hinges ad secure them with following screws.
‰ M2.5x4.0S
FLAT BIND screw
×4
CAUTION: When installing the hinges, be sure to apply Locktight-425 or Locktight-7400
to the screws.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
App-ii
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Appendix
Contents
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module......................................................................... A-1
Appendix B Board Layout................................................................................................B-1
B.1
B.2
B.3
System Board Front View <FNCSY*>..................................................................B-1
System Board Back View <FNCSY*> ..................................................................B-3
HDD FPC View <FNCHD*> ................................................................................B-5
Appendix C Pin Assignments........................................................................................... C-1
C.1
CN1440 Memory connector (200-PIN) .................................................................C-1
CN1800 HDD FPC I/F connector (50-PIN)...........................................................C-5
CN1820 ODD I/F connector (50-PIN)...................................................................C-6
IS2110 PC card I/F connector (68-PIN)..............................................................C-7
IS2130 SD card I/F connector (12-PIN)..............................................................C-8
IS2140 CF card I/F connector (50-PIN)..............................................................C-9
CN2200 Wireless LAN card I/F connector (124-PIN) ........................................C-10
CN3001 Modem cable connector (4-PIN) ...........................................................C-12
CN3000 MDC I/F connector (30-PIN) ................................................................C-12
CN3230 Keyboard I/F connector (30-PIN)..........................................................C-13
CN3240 Pad I/F connector (8-PIN) .....................................................................C-13
CN3400 Debug port connector (4-PIN)...............................................................C-14
CN4100 LAN I/F connector (8-PIN) ...................................................................C-14
CN3270 Switch membrane I/F connector (13-PIN) ............................................C-14
CN4200 IEEE1394 I/F connector (4-PIN)...........................................................C-15
CN4400 Bluetooth I/F connector (20-PIN)..........................................................C-15
CN5044 USB Port0 & Port3 I/F connector (8-PIN) ............................................C-16
CN5043 USB Port5 I/F connector (4-PIN)..........................................................C-16
CN5600 LCD connector (15-PIN) .......................................................................C-16
CN8812 Inverter I/F connector (9-PIN)...............................................................C-17
CN5620 CRT I/F connector (15-PIN)..................................................................C-17
CN6050 Internal microphone connector (2-PIN)...............................................C-17
J6051 External microphone connector (5-PIN)...............................................C-18
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
C.7
C.8
C.9
C.10
C.11
C.12
C.13
C.14
C.15
C.16
C.17
C.18
C.19
C.20
C.21
C.22
C.23
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
App-iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
C.24
C.25
C.26
C.27
C.28
C.29
C.30
C.31
C.32
CN8800 DC-IN connector (4-PIN)......................................................................C-18
J8810 Battery I/F connector (10-PIN).............................................................C-18
CN6180 Speaker connector (4-PIN) ....................................................................C-18
J6310 Headphone connector (5-PIN) ..............................................................C-19
CN8760 RTC battery connector (3-PIN) .............................................................C-19
CN8770 Fan connector (3-PIN) ...........................................................................C-19
CN2300 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN) ..................................................C-20
CN9600 System board I/F connector (50-PIN)....................................................C-24
CN9610 HDD I/F connector (44-PIN).................................................................C-25
Appendix D Display Codes............................................................................................... D-1
Appendix E Key Layout....................................................................................................E-1
E.1
Keyboard ................................................................................................................E-1
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams..........................................................................................F-1
F.1
F.2
F.3
LAN Loopback Connector.....................................................................................F-1
RS-232C Cable (9-pin to 9-pin).............................................................................F-1
RS-232C Cable (9-pin to 25-pin)...........................................................................F-2
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures ..........................................................................G-1
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures.....................................................................H-1
Appendix I Reliability.......................................................................................................I-1
App-iv
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Figures
Figure B-1 System board layout (front)..............................................................................B-1
Figure B-2 System board layout (back) ..............................................................................B-3
Figure B-3 HDD FPC layout ..............................................................................................B-5
Figure E-1 Keyboard ..........................................................................................................E-1
Figure F-1 LAN loopback connector..................................................................................F-1
Figure F-2 RS-232C Cable (9-pin to 9-pin) .......................................................................F-1
Figure F-3 RS-232C Cable (9-pin to 25-pin) .....................................................................F-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
App-v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Tables
Table B-1 System board ICs and connectors (front) .........................................................B-2
Table B-2 System board ICs and connectors (back) .........................................................B-4
Table B-3 HDD FPC connectors .......................................................................................B-5
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-PIN) ..........................................................................C-1
Table C-2 HDD FPC I/F connector (50-PIN)....................................................................C-5
Table C-3 ODD I/F connector (50-PIN)............................................................................C-6
Table C-4 PC card I/F connector (68-PIN)........................................................................C-7
Table C-5 SD card I/F connector (12-PIN) .......................................................................C-8
Table C-6 CF card I/F connector (50-PIN)........................................................................C-9
Table C-7 CN2200 Wireless LAN card I/F connector (124-PIN)...................................C-10
Table C-8 Modem cable connector (4-PIN) ....................................................................C-12
Table C-9 MDC I/F connector (30-PIN) .........................................................................C-12
Table C-10 Keyboard I/F connector (30-PIN)...................................................................C-13
Table C-11 Pad I/F connector (8-PIN) ..............................................................................C-13
Table C-12 Debug port connector (4-PIN)........................................................................C-14
Table C-13 LAN I/F connector (8-PIN) ............................................................................C-14
Table C-14 Switch membrane I/F connector (13-PIN) .....................................................C-14
Table C-15 IEEE1394 I/F connector (4-PIN)....................................................................C-15
Table C-16 Bluetooth I/F connector (20-PIN)...................................................................C-16
Table C-17 USB Port0 & Port3 I/F connector (8-PIN).....................................................C-16
Table C-18 USB Port5 I/F connector (4-PIN)...................................................................C-16
Table C-19 LCD connector (15-PIN)................................................................................C-16
Table C-20 Inverter I/F connector (9-PIN)........................................................................C-17
Table C-21 CRT I/F connector (15-PIN)...........................................................................C-17
Table C-22 Internal microphone connector (2-PIN) .........................................................C-17
Table C-23 External microphone connector (5-PIN) ........................................................C-18
Table C-24 DC-IN connector (4-PIN)...............................................................................C-18
Table C-25 Battery I/F connector (10-PIN).......................................................................C-18
App-vi
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
Table C-26 Speaker connector (4-PIN).............................................................................C-18
Table C-27 Headphone connector (5-PIN)........................................................................C-19
Table C-28 RTC battery connector (3-PIN)......................................................................C-19
Table C-29 Fan connector (3-PIN)....................................................................................C-19
Table C-30 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN)...........................................................C-20
Table C-31 System board I/F connector (50-PIN) ............................................................C-24
Table C-32 HDD I/F connector (44-PIN)..........................................................................C-25
Table D-1 Display Codes ................................................................................................. D-1
Table I-1
MTBF ................................................................................................................I-1
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
App-vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendices
App-viii
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
Precautions for handling the LCD module
The LCD module can be easily damaged during assembly or disassembly. Observe the
following precautions when handling the LCD module:
1. When installing the LCD module in the LCD cover, be sure to seat it so that it is
properly aligned and maximum visibility of the display is maintained.
2. Be careful to align the holes at the four corners of the LCD module with the
corresponding holes in the LCD cover before securing the module with screws.
Do not force the module into place, because stress can affect its performance.
Also, the panel’s polarized surface is easily scarred, so be careful when handling it.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
3. If the panel’s surface gets dirty, wipe it with cotton or a soft cloth. If it is still dirty,
try breathing on the surface to create a light condensate and wipe it again.
If the surface is very dirty, we recommend a CRT cleaning agent. Apply the agent to
a cloth and then wipe the panel’s surface. Do not apply cleanser directly to the panel.
4. If water or other liquid is left on the panel’s surface for a long period, it can change
the screen’s tint or stain it. Be sure to quickly wipe off any liquid.
A-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
5. Glass is used in the panel, so be careful not to drop it or let it strike a hard object,
which could cause breakage or cracks.
6. CMOS-LSI circuits are used in the module, so guard against damage from
electrostatic discharge. Be sure to wear a wrist or ankle ground when handling the
module.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
7. Do not expose the module to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet rays for long periods.
8. Do not store the module at temperatures below specifications. Cold can cause the
liquid crystals to freeze, lose their elasticity or otherwise suffer damage.
9. Do not disassemble the LCD module. Disassembly can cause malfunctions.
A-4
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
10. If you transport the module, do not use packing material that contains epoxy resin
(amine) or silicon glue (alcohol or oxide). These materials can release gas that can
damage the panel’s polarization.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Handling the LCD Module
A-6
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Appendix B Board Layout
B.1
System Board Front View <FNCSY*>
(c)
(a)
(b)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(u)
(g)
(h)
(t)
(s)
(r)
(i)
(q)
(p)
(j)
(k)
(o)
(n)
(m)
(l)
Figure B-1 System board layout (front)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.1 System Board Front View <FNCSY*>
Appendix B Board Layout
Table B-1 System board ICs and connectors (front)
Mark
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Number
IS2130
IC3000
IS2140
CN6050
CN8760
VR6240
CN2200
J6310
Name
SD Card I/F connector
FWH
CF Card I/F connector
Internal Microphone connector
RTC Battery I/F connector
Volume Controller
(g)
(h)
(i)
Wireless LAN Card I/F connector
Headphone I/F connector
External Microphone /F connector
EC/KBC
J6051
(j)
IC3200
IS2110
CN3230
CN3270
CN5600
CN8812
CN4100
CN3240
IC6000
CN3400
CN4400
CN6180
(k)
(l)
PC Card I/F connector
Keyboard I/F connector
Switch Membrane I/F connector
LCD I/F connector
(m)
(n)
(o)
(p)
(q)
(r)
Inverter I/F connector
LAN I/F connector
Pad I/F connector
South Bridge (ICH4-M)
Debugging Port I/F connector
Bluetooth I/F connector
Speaker connector
(s)
(t)
(u)
B-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Board Layout
B.2 System Board Back View <FNCSY*>
B.2
System Board Back View <FNCSY*>
(b)
(a)
(c)
(d)
(o)
(n)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
Figure B-2 System board layout (back)
(m)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.2 System Board Back View <FNCSY*>
Appendix B Board Layout
Table B-2 System board ICs and connectors (back)
Mark
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Number
CN4200
CN4614
CN8800
CN3000
CN2300
CN1440
CN3001
IC1200
Name
IEEE1394 I/F connector
USB Port0&3
DC-IN connector
MDC I/F connector
Docking Port I/F connector
Memory Module I/F connector
MDC Harness connector
North Bridge (Montara-GM+)
Battery I/F connector
Fan connector
(g)
(h)
(i)
J8810
(j)
CN8770
IC1005
(k)
(l)
CPU
CN5620
CN4613
CN1800
CN1820
CRT I/F connector
USB Port5
(m)
(n)
(o)
HDD FPC I/F connector
ODD I/F connector
B-4
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Board Layout
B.3 HDD FPC View <FNCHD*>
B.3
HDD FPC View <FNCHD*>
(b)
<Front layout>
(a)
<Back layout>
Figure B-3 HDD FPC layout
Table B-3 HDD FPC connectors
Mark
(a)
Number
Name
CN9600
CN9610
System board I/F connector
HDD I/F connector
(b)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.3 HDD FPC View <FNCHD*>
Appendix B Board Layout
B-6
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Appendix C Pin Assignment
System Board FNCSY*
C.1 CN144O Memory connector (200-PIN)
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-PIN) (1/4)
PIN No.
1
Signal name
VREF
I/O
-
PIN No.
2
Signal name
VREF
I/O
-
3
GND
-
4
GND
-
5
SDQ01-B2P
SDQ00R-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
6
SDQ04-B2P
SDQ05-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
SDQS0-B2P
SDQ06-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDM00-B2P
SDQ02-B2P
GND
I
I/O
-
SDQ07-B2P
SDQ09-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ03-B2P
SDQ13-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ08-B2P
SDQS1-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ12-B2P
SDM01-B2P
GND
I/O
I
-
SDQ14-B2P
SDQ10-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ15-B2P
SDQ11-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SCK3-B2P
SCK3-B2N
GND
I
2R5-B2V
-
I
GND
-
-
GND
-
SDQ20-B2P
SDQ21-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ17-B2P
SDQ16-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQS2-B2P
SDQ18-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDM02-B2P
SDQ19-B2P
GND
I
I/O
-
SDQ23-B2P
SDQ29-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ22-B2P
SDQ28-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.1 CN144O Memory connector (200-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-PIN) (2/4)
PIN No.
59
Signal name
SDQ25-B2P
SDQS3-B2P
GND
I/O
PIN No.
60
Signal name
SDQ24-B2P
SDM03-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
61
I/O
62
I
63
-
64
-
65
SDQ27-B2P
SDQ31-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
66
SDQ30-B2P
SDQ26-B2P
2R5-B2V
SCB0B-B2P
SCB1B-B2P
GND
I/O
67
I/O
68
I/O
69
-
70
-
71
SCB5B-B2P
SCB4B-B2P
GND
I/O
72
I/O
73
I/O
74
I/O
75
-
76
-
77
SDQS8B-B2P
SCB2B-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
78
GND
-
79
I/O
80
SCB3B-B2P
2R5-B2V
SCB7B-B2P
N.C
I/O
81
-
I/O
-
82
-
I/O
-
83
SCB6B-B2P
N.C
84
85
86
87
GND
-
88
GND
-
89
2R5-B2V
-
90
GND
-
91
GND
-
92
2R5-B2V
2R5-B2V
SCKE2-B2P
N.C
-
93
2R5-B2V
-
94
-
95
SCKE3-B2P
N.C
I
96
I
97
-
98
-
99
SMA12-B2P
SMA09-B2P
GND
I
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
SMA11-B2P
SMA08-B2P
GND
I
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
I
I
-
-
SMA07-B2P
SMAB05-B2P
SMA03-B2P
SMAB01-B2P
2R5-B2V
I
SMA06-B2P
SMA04-B2P
SMA02-B2P
SMA00-B2P
2R5-B2V
SBS1-B2P
SRAS-B2N
SCAS-B2N
SCS3-B2N
N.C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
SMA10-B2P
SBS0-B2P
SWE-B2N
SCS2-B2N
N.C
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
-
C-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.1 CN144O Memory connector (200-PIN)
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-PIN) (3/4)
PIN No.
125
127
129
131
133
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175
177
179
181
183
185
187
189
Signal name
GND
I/O
-
PIN No.
126
128
130
132
134
136
138
140
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
172
174
176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
Signal name
GND
I/O
-
SDQ33-B2P
SDQ32-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ36-B2P
SDQ37-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQS4-B2P
SDQ39-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDM04-B2P
SDQ34R-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ38-B2P
SDQ40-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ35-B2P
SDQ41-B2P
2R5-B2V
-
I
-
SDQ45-B2P
SDQ55-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ44-B2P
SDM05-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ46-B2P
SDQ43-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ47-B2P
SDQ42-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
2R5-B2V
-
SCK4-B2N
SCK4-B2P
GND
I
GND
-
I
GND
-
-
SDQ52-B2P
SDQ49-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ53-B2P
SDQ48-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQS6-B2P
SDQ51-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDM06-B2P
SDQ55-B2P
GND
I
I/O
-
SDQ50-B2P
SDQ60-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ54-B2P
SDQ61-B2P
2R5-B2V
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ56-B2P
SDQS7-B2P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
SDQ57-B2P
SDM07-B2P
GND
I/O
I
-
SDQ52R-B2P
SDQ59R-B2P
I/O
I/O
SDQ62-B2P
SDQ63-B2P
I/O
I/O
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.1 CN144O Memory connector (200-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
Table C-1 Memory connector (200-PIN) (4/4)
PIN No.
191
Signal name
2R5-B2V
SMBDAT-P3P
SMBCLK-P3P
P3V
I/O
-
PIN No.
192
Signal name
2R5-B2V
P3V
I/O
-
-
-
-
-
193
I/O
I/O
-
194
195
196
GND
197
198
GND
199
N.C
-
200
N.C
C-4
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.2 CN1800 HDD FPC I/F connector (50-PIN)
C.2 CN1800 HDD FPC I/F connector (50-PIN)
Table C-2 HDD FPC I/F connector (50-PIN)
PIN No.
1
Signal name
GND
I/O
-
PIN No.
2
Signal name
IDRSTA-P5N
GND
I/O
I
3
PDD07-P3P
PDD08-P3P
PDD09-P3P
PDD05-P3P
PDD04-P3P
PDD11-P3P
PDD12-P3P
PDD02-P3P
PDD01-P3P
PDD14-P3P
PDD15-P3P
PDDREQ-P3P
GND
I
4
5
O
O
I
6
PDD06-P3P
GND
O
O
I
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
PDD10-P3P
GND
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
I
O
PDD03-P3P
GND
I
I
PDD13-P3P
GND
O
-
O
O
I
PDD00-P3P
GND
I
-
PDIOW-P3N
PDIOR-P3N
PIORDY-P3P
PDDACK-P3N
GND
I
-
I
GND
I
GND
I
IRQ14-P3P
PDA1-P3P
PDA2-P3P
PDCS1-P3N
P5V
I
O
O
I
-
PAD0-P3P
GND
O
PDCS3-P3N
P5V
O
-
-
P5V
-
P5V
P5V
HDDLED-P5N
GND
I
-
-
GND
-
-
GND
GND
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.3 CN1820 ODD I/F connector (50-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.3 CN1820 ODD I/F connector (50-PIN)
Table C-3 ODD I/F connector (50-PIN)
PIN No.
1
Signal name
(AUDIO-L)
N.C.
I/O
PIN No.
2
Signal name
(AUDIO-R)
N.C.
I/O
-
-
3
-
4
-
5
IDRSTB-P5N
SDD07-P3P
SDD06-P3P
SDD05-P3P
SDD04-P3P
SDD03-P3P
SDD02-P3P
SDD01-P3P
SDD00-P3P
GND
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
6
SDD08-P3P
SDD09-P3P
SDD10-P3P
SDD11-P3P
SDD12-P3P
SDD13-P3P
SDD14-P3P
SDD15-P3P
SDDREQ-P3P
SDIOR-P3N
GND
I/O
7
8
I/O
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
2T
I/O
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
1T
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
SDIOW-P3N
SIORDY-P3P
IRQ15-P3P
SDA1-P3P
SDA0-P3P
SDCS1-P3N
(DASP)
I
-
O
O
I
SDDACK-P3N
N.C.
I
-
N.C.
-
I
SDA2-P3P
SDCS3-P3N
SB-P5V
I
I
I
-
-
SB-P5V
-
SB-P5V
-
SB-P5V
-
SB-P5V
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
N.C.
-
GND
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
GND
-
GND
-
C-6
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.4 IS2110 PC card I/F connector (68-PIN)
C.4 IS2110 PC card I/F connector (68-PIN)
Table C-4 PC card I/F connector (68-PIN) (1/2)
PIN No.
1
Signal name
GND
I/O
-
PIN No.
2
Signal name
BCAD00-EYP
BCAD03-EYP
BCAD07-EYP
BCAD09-EYP
BCAD12-EYP
BCCBE1-EYN
BCPERR-EYN
BCINT-EYN
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
3
BCAD01-EYP
BCAD05-EYP
BCCBE0-EYN
BCAD11-EYP
BCAD14-EYP
BCPAR-EYP
BCGNT-EYN
MCVCCB-EYV
BCCLK-EYP
BCCBE2-EYN
BCAD20-EYP
BCAD22-EYP
BCAD24-EYP
BCAD26-EYP
BCAD29-EYP
BCCLKR-EYN
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
I
MCVPPB-EYV
BCIRDY-EYN
BCAD18-EYP
BCAD21-EYP
BCAD23-EYP
BCAD25-EYP
BCAD27-EYP
BCD02-EYP
GND
I
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
BCCD1-E3N
BCAD04-EYP
BCD14-EYP
BCAD10-EYP
BCAD13-EYP
BCAD16-EYP
BCLOCK-EYN
BCDEVS-EYN
MCVPPB-EYV
O
BCAD02-EYP
BCAD06-EYP
BCAD08-EYP
BCVS1-E3P
BCAD15-EYP
BCA18-EYP
BCSTOP-EYN
MCVCCB-EYV
BCTRDY-EYN
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I/O
BCFRAM-
EYN
I/O
55
57
59
61
BCAD17-EYP
BCVS2-E3P
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
56
58
60
62
BCAD19-EYP
BCRST-EYN
BCREQ-EYN
BCAUDI-EYP
I/O
I
BCSERR-EYN
BCCBE3-EYN
I/O
O
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.5 IS2130 SD card I/F connector (12-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
Table C-4 PC card I/F connector (68-PIN) (2/2)
PIN No.
63
Signal name
BCSTSC-EYP
BCAD30-EYP
BCCD2-E3N
I/O
O
PIN No.
64
Signal name
BCAD28-EYP
BCAD31-EYP
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
65
I/O
I/O
66
67
68
C.5 IS2130 SD card I/F connector (12-PIN)
Table C-5 SD card I/F connector (12-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
1
3
SDAT3-E3P
GND
I/O
-
2
4
SDCMD-E3P
SD-E3V
GND
I/O
-
5
SDCLK-E3P
SDAT0-E3P
SDAT2-E3P
SDWP-E3P
GND
O
I/O
I/O
-
6
-
7
8
SDAT1-E3P
SDCD-E3N
GND
I/O
9
10
12
2T
4T
I
-
-
-
11
1T
3T
-
GND
GND
-
GND
C-8
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.6 IS2140 CF card I/F connector (50-PIN)
C.6 IS2140 CF card I/F connector (50-PIN)
Table C-6 CF card I/F connector (50-PIN)
PIN No.
1
Signal name
GND
I/O
-
PIN No.
2
Signal name
CFD03-EYP
CFD05-EYP
CFD07-EYP
CFA10-EYN
CFA09-EYP
CFA07-EYP
CFA06-EYP
CFA04-EYP
CFA02-EYP
CFA00-EYP
CFD01-EYP
CFWP-EYP
CFCD1-E3N
CFD12-EYP
CFD14-EYP
CFCE2-EYN
CFIORD-EYN
CFWE-EYN
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
3
CFD04-EYP
CFD06-EYP
CFCE1-EYN
CFOE-EYN
CFA08-EYP
MCVCCA-EYV
CFA05-EYP
CFA03-EYP
CFA01-EYP
CFD00-EYP
CFD02-EYP
CFCD2-E3N
CFD11-EYP
CFD13-EYP
CFD15-EYP
CFVS1-E3P
CFIOWR-EYN
CFRDY-EYP
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
MCVCCA-
EYV
-
39
41
43
45
47
49
1T
CFA25-EYP
CFRST-EYP
CFIPAC-EYN
CFBVD2-EYP
CFD08-EYP
CFD10-EYP
GND
-
I
40
42
44
46
48
50
2T
CFVS2-E3N
CFWAIT-EYN
CFREG-EYN
CFBVD1-EYP
CFD09-EYP
GND
I/O
O
-
I/O
O
O
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
-
GND
-
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.7 CN2200 Wireless LAN card I/F connector (124-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.7 CN2200 Wireless LAN card I/F connector (124-PIN)
Table C-7 Wireless LAN card I/F connector (124-PIN) (1/2)
PIN No.
1
Signal name
N.C.
I/O
PIN No.
2
Signal name
N.C.
I/O
-
-
-
3
N.C.
4
N.C.
-
5
N.C.
-
6
N.C.
-
-
7
N.C.
-
8
N.C.
9
N.C.
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
N.C.
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
WLON-S3N
GND
I
N.C.
-
-
N.C.
-
PIRQA-P3N
P3V
I/O
-
P5V
-
PIRQG-P3N
N.C.
I/O
-
N.C.
-
GND
-
E3V
-
X33MPC-P3P
GND
I
PCIRST-S3N
P3V
I
-
-
PREQ2-P3N
P3V
O
-
PGNT2-S3N
GND
I
-
AD31-P3P
AD29-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
PME-S3N
WCHCLK-P3P
AD30-P3P
P3V
I/O
-
I/O
-
AD27-P3P
AD25-P3P
WCHDAT-P3P
CBE3-P3N
AD23-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
AD28-P3P
AD26-P3P
AD24-P3P
AD21-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
I/O
I/O
-
AD21-P3P
AD19-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
-
AD22-P3P
AD20-P3P
PAR-P3P
AD18-P3P
AD16-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
AD17-P3P
CBE2-P3N
IRDY-P3N
I/O
I/O
I/O
C-10
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.7 CN2200 Wireless LAN card I/F connector (124-PIN)
Table C-7 Wireless LAN card I/F connector (124-PIN) (2/2)
PIN No.
63
Signal name
P3V
I/O
PIN No.
64
Signal name
FRAME-P3N
TRDY-P3N
STOP-P3N
P3V
I/O
-
I/O
65
CLKRUN-P3N
SERR-P3N
GND
I
66
I/O
67
I/O
68
I/O
69
-
70
-
71
PERR-P3N
CBE1-P3N
AD14-P3P
GND
I/O
72
DEVSEL-P3N
GND
0
73
I/O
74
-
75
I/O
76
AD15-P3P
AD13-P3P
AD11-P3P
GND
I/O
77
-
78
I/O
79
AD12-P3P
AD10-P3P
GND
I/O
80
I/O
81
I/O
82
-
83
-
84
AD09-P3P
CBE0-P3N
P3V
I/O
85
AD08-P3P
AD07-P3P
P3V
I/O
86
I/O
87
I/O
88
-
89
-
90
AD06-P3P
AD04-P3P
AD02-P3P
AD00-P3P
N.C.
I/O
91
AD05-P3P
N.C.
I/O
92
I/O
93
-
94
I/O
95
AD03-P3P
P5V
I/O
96
I/O
-
97
-
I/O
-
98
99
AD01-P3P
GND
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
116
118
120
122
124
2T
N.C.
-
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
121
123
1T
GND
-
N.C.
-
GND
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
GND
-
GND
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
GND
-
N.C.
-
GND
-
GND
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
N.C.
-
E3V
-
GND
-
GND
-
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.8 CN3001 Modem cable connector (4-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.8 CN3001 Modem cable connector (4-PIN)
Table C-8 Modem cable connector (4-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
MDMTIP-E3P
MDMRNG-E3P
I/O
I/O
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
MDMTIP-E3P
MDMRNG-E3P
I/O
I/O
I/O
1
3
2
4
C.9 CN3000 MDC I/F connector (30-PIN)
Table C-9 MDC I/F connector (30-PIN)
PIN No.
1
Signal name
N.C
I/O
-
PIN No.
2
Signal name
GND
I/O
-
-
3
GND
-
4
N.C
5
N.C
-
6
N.C
-
7
N.C
-
8
GND
-
9
N.C
-
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
2T
N.C
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
1T
N.C
-
N.C
-
N.C
-
N.C
-
GND
-
E3V
-
E3V
-
N.C
-
GND
-
GND
-
N.C
-
M97SY2-P3P
N.C
I
M97OT2-P3P
M97RS2-S3N
GND
I
-
I
M97IN2-E3P
GND
O
-
-
GND
-
X97BC2-P3P
GND
I/O
-
GND
-
C-12
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.10 CN3230 Keyboard I/F connector (30-PIN)
C.10 CN3230 Keyboard I/F connector (30-PIN)
Table C-10 Keyboard I/F connector (30-PIN)
PIN No.
1
Signal name
N.C
I/O
-
PIN No.
2
Signal name
N.C
I/O
-
3
CAPLED-P5N
KBSC00-S3N
KBSC02-S3N
KBSC04-S3N
KBSC06-S3N
KBSC07-S3N
KBSC09-S3N
KBRT02-S3N
KBSC10-S3N
KBRT04-S3N
KBSC12-S3N
KBRT06-S3N
KBSC14-S3N
N.C
I
4
P5V
-
5
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
6
KBSC01-S3N
KBSC03-S3N
KBSC05-S3N
KBRT00-S3N
KBSC08-S3N
KBRT01-S3N
KBRT03-S3N
KBSC11-S3N
KBRT05-S3N
KBSC13-S3N
KBRT07-S3N
KBSC15-S3N
N.C
O
O
O
I
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
2T
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
1T
O
I
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
I
O
-
O
-
GND
-
GND
-
C.11 CN3240 Pad I/F connector (8-PIN)
Table C-11 Pad I/F connector (8-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
P5V
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
P5V
I/O
1
3
-
I/O
-
2
4
-
I/O
-
IPDDAT-P5P
N.C.
IPDCLK-P5P
GND
5
6
7
GND
-
8
GND
-
1T
GND
-
2T
GND
-
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.12 CN3400 Debug port connector (4-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.12 CN3400 Debug port connector (4-PIN)
Table C-12 Debug port connector (4-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
P3V
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
RXD-E3P
GND
I/O
O
-
1
3
-
I
2
4
TXD-P3P
GND
1T
-
2T
GND
-
C.13 CN4100 LAN I/F connector (8-PIN)
Table C-13 LAN I/F connector (8-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
BIDCP-EXP
BIDDP-EXP
BIDAP-EXP
BIDBP-EXP
N.C.
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
BIDCN-EXN
BIDDN-EXN
BIDAN-EXN
BIDBN-EXN
N.C.
I/O
1
3
I
O
I
2
4
I
O
I
5
6
7
O
-
8
O
-
9
10
12
14
11
13
LINK-E3N
LAN-E3V
I
ACT-E3N
I
-
LAN-E3V
-
C.14 CN3270 Switch membrane I/F connector (13-PIN)
Table C-14 Switch membrane I/F connector (13-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
PNLOFF-S3N
GPBTNA-S3N
N.C.
I/O
O
O
-
PIN No.
Signal name
GPBTNB-S3N
GND
I/O
O
-
1
3
2
4
5
6
PWRSW-S3N
N.C.
O
-
7
N.C.
-
8
9
N.C.
-
10
12
N.C.
-
11
13
1T
ARWLED-S3P
P5V
I
NUMLED-S3P
I
-
GND
-
2T
GND
-
C-14
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.15 CN4200 IEEE1394 I/F connector (4-PIN)
C.15 CN4200 IEEE1394 I/F connector (4-PIN)
Table C-15 IEEE1394 I/F connector (4-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
TPBO-E3N
TPAO-E3N
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
PIN No.
Signal name
TPBO-E3P
TPAO-E3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
1
3
2
4
1T
3T
2T
4T
GND
-
GND
-
C.16 CN4400 Bluetooth I/F connector (20-PIN)
Table C-16 Bluetooth I/F connector (20-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
GND
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
N.C.
I/O
1
3
-
O
-
2
4
-
-
BTMDL-P3N
N.C.
N.C.
5
6
N.C.
-
7
N.C.
-
8
BTRST-S3N
N.C.
I
9
N.C.
-
10
12
14
16
18
-
11
13
15
17
GND
-
N.C.
-
GND
-
WCHCLK-P3P
USBP4-S3P
O
I/O
I
N.C.
-
USBP4-S3N
I/O
WCHDAT-
P3P
19
1T
N.C.
-
-
20
2T
BT-P3V
GND
-
-
GND
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.17 CN5044 USB Port0 & Port3 I/F connector (8-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.17 CN5044 USB Port0 & Port3 I/F connector (8-PIN)
Table C-17 USB Port0 & 3 I/F connector (8-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
USB0PS-E5V
USBP0-S3P
USB0PS-E5V
USBP3-S3P
GND
I/O
I
PIN No.
Signal name
USBP0-S3N
GND
I/O
1
3
2
4
-
-
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
5
6
USBP3-S3N
GND
I/O
-
7
8
1T
2T
GND
-
C.18 CN5043 USB Port5 I/F connector (4-PIN)
Table C-18 USB Port5 I/F connector (4-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
USB1PS-E5V
USBP5-S3P
GND
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
USBP5-S3N
GND
I/O
I/O
-
1
3
I
I/O
-
2
4
1T
3T
2T
GND
-
GND
-
C.19 CN5600 LCD connector (15-PIN)
Table C-19 LCD connector (15-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
PNL-P3V
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
PNL-P3V
GND
I/O
1
3
5
-
-
I
2
4
6
-
-
I
N.C
TXDTA0-PYP
TXDTA0-
PYN
7
GND
-
8
TXCLKA-
PYP
I
9
TXCLKA-PYN
TXDTA1-PYP
I
I
10
12
GND
-
I
11
TXDTA1-
PYN
13
15
GND
-
I
14
TXDTA2-PYP
I
TXDTA2-PYN
C-16
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.20 CN8812 Inverter I/F connector (9-PIN)
C.20 CN8812 Inverter I/F connector (9-PIN)
Table C-20 Inverter I/F connector (9-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
FL-P5V
FL-P5V
GND
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
FL-P5V
I/O
1
3
5
7
9
-
-
-
-
I
2
4
6
8
-
I
-
I
BRT2DA-S3P
GND
GND
BRT1-P5P
BRT0-P5P
C.21 CN5620 CRT I/F connector (15-PIN)
Table C-21 CRT I/F connector (15-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
1
MRED-PXP
I
2
MGREEN-
PXP
I
3
5
MBLUE-PXP
GND
I
-
-
-
-
I
4
6
N.C
-
-
-
-
I
GND
7
GND
8
GND
9
(DDC-P5V)
N.C
10
12
14
GND
11
13
CRTSDA-P5P
MHSYNC-P3P
MVSYNC-
P3P
I
15
1T
CRTSCL-P5P
GND
I
-
2T
GND
-
C.22 CN6050 Internal microphone connector (2-PIN)
Table C-22 Internal microphone connector (2-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
1
(VREF1-P2V)
I
2
A-GND
-
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.23 J6051 External microphone connector (5-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.23 J6051 External microphone connector (5-PIN)
Table C-23 External microphone connector (5-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
A-GND
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
(MICIN-PXP)
(VREF1-P2V)
I/O
1
3
5
-
I
2
4
I
I
(VREF1-P2V)
N.C
-
C.24 CN8800 DC-IN connector (4-PIN)
Table C-24 DC-IN connector (4-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
1
(PVL POWER)
O
2
(PVL
O
POWER)
3
GND
4
GND
C.25 J8810 Battery I/F connector (10-PIN)
Table C-25 Battery I/F connector (10-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
PVBL1
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
BTMP1
I/O
O
-
1
3
5
7
9
-
-
2
4
(DCHG)
PSCL-S5P
GND
M5V
I/O
-
6
PSDA-S5P
DBT10V-S5N
GND
I/O
O
-
8
GND
-
10
C.26 CN6180 Speaker connector (4-PIN)
Table C-26 Speaker connector (4-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
SPOTL-PXN
SPOTR-PXP
I/O
O
PIN No.
Signal name
SPOTL-PXP
SPOTR-PXN
I/O
O
1
3
2
4
O
O
C-18
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.27 J6310 Headphone connector (5-PIN)
C.27 J6310 Headphone connector (5-PIN)
Table C-27 Headphone connector (5-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
A-GND
I/O
-
PIN No.
Signal name
HEADL-PXP
A-GND
I/O
1
3
5
2
4
I
HEADR-PXP
SPKEN-P4P
I
-
O
C.28 CN8760 RTC battery connector (3-PIN)
Table C-28 RTC battery connector (3-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
(Vbat)
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
1
3
-
-
2
N.C
-
R3V
C.29 CN8770 Fan connector (3-PIN)
Table C-29 Fan connector (3-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
FAN VCC
I/O
-
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
1
3
2
GND
-
FANG-P3P
O
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.30 CN2300 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.30 CN2300 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN)
Table C-30 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN) (1/4)
PIN No.
A1
A3
1
Signal name
DSKDC
I/O
O
O
O
O
I/O
-
PIN No.
A2
A4
2
Signal name
GND
I/O
-
-
DSKDC
GND
O
DCOUT
DCOUT
-
3
DOCDT1-S3N
EXMSCK-P5P
GND
4
IF-P5V
I/O
5
6
EXKBCK-P5P
N.C.
-
7
8
O
-
-
9
DPCONF-S5P
GND
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
GND
I/O
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
DDCACK-P3P
DGREEN-PXP
DVSYNC-P3P
N.C.
I
I
DRED-PXP
DBLUE-PXP
(DVISCL-P3P)
GND
I
I
I/O
-
-
-
(DVI_PRTCT2)
(DVITX2-P3P)
(DVITX1-P3P)
(DVITX0-P3P)
GND
-
I
(DVI_PRTCT1)
(DVITX2-P3N)
(DVITX1-P3N)
(DVITX0-P3N)
GND
I
I
I
I
-
I
-
I
(DVITXC-P3P)
(DVIDET-S3N)
N.C.
I
I
(DVITXC-P3N)
(DVIPD0)
O
I
-
I/O
O
(QSWON-B3P)
GND
(DIRQD-S3N)
-
(PCM2SP-
B3P)
I
I/O
39
(DPMRST-
S3N)
40
(DAD00-P3P)
-
I/O
-
I/O
I/O
I
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
GND
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
(DAD00-P3P)
(DAD06-P3P)
(XDPCI-P3P)
(DAD11-P3P)
(DAD11-P3P)
(DINTA-P3N)
RESERVED
BIDDN-EXN
(DAD02-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
(DAD09-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
(DAD15-P3P)
RESERVED
BIDDP-EXP
O
O
C-20
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.30 CN2300 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN)
Table C-30 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN) (2/4)
PIN No.
57
Signal name
RESERVED
MDMRNG-E3P
DCOUT
I/O
-
PIN No.
58
Signal name
RESERVED
MDMTIP-E3P
DCOUT
I/O
-
I/O
O
I/O
O
-
59
60
61
62
I/O
I/O
-
63
EJCTRQ-S3N
EXMSDT-P5P
GND
64
IF-P5V
I/O
I
65
66
EXKBDT-P5P
67
68
(DNVSON-
S3P)
I
O
69
(DILSON-S3P)
70
(NVPCNF-
S3P)
-
-
I/O
-
71
73
75
77
GND
72
74
76
78
DDCADA-P3P
(GPU-GND)
(GPU-GND)
(GPU-GND)
(DVISDA-P3P)
-
DHSYNC-P3P
I
I/O
(DVI_PRTCT3
)
-
79
81
83
85
87
89
GND
-
-
-
-
-
-
80
82
84
86
88
90
(DVITX5-P3P)
(DVITX4-P3P)
(DVITX3-P3P)
DVI16
-
-
-
-
-
-
(DVITX5-P3N)
(DVITX4-P3N)
(DVITX3-P3N)
DVI17
GND
GND
(DOC_ON_LE
D1)
91
N.C.
-
92
(DOC_ON_LE
D2)
-
93
95
97
(DVIPD1)
(DCADIO-S3P)
GND
I
O
-
94
96
98
DVI_PRTCT4
(DSMI-B3P)
-
O
(DCKRUN-
P3N)
I/O
99
(PME-S3P)
GND
O
-
100
102
104
106
108
110
112
114
(DAD01-P3P)
(DAD03-P3P)
(DAD07-P3P)
(DAD08-P3P)
(DAD10-P3P)
(DAD14-P3P)
(DPAR-P3P)
Reserved
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
(DAD05-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
(DAD10-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
(DCBE1-P3N)
Reserved
I/O
-
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.30 CN2300 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
Table C-30 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN) (3/4)
PIN No.
115
Signal name
BIDCN-EXN
BIDCP-EXP
Reserved
DCOUT
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
PIN No.
116
Signal name
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
DCOUT
I/O
-
117
118
-
119
120
-
121
O
I/O
-
122
O
-
123
DSSCL-S5P
M5V
124
IF-P5V
125
126
(DTPA-E3P)
(DTPB-E3P)
I/O
I/O
O
127
GND
-
128
129
(USBON1-E5N)
I
130
(USBOC1-
E3N)
131
GND
-
132
(USBON2-
E5N)
I
133
135
137
139
141
143
145
147
149
151
153
155
157
159
161
163
165
167
169
171
173
175
177
(USBOC2-E3N)
SNDVCC_OFF
DINL-PXP
GND
O
-
134
136
138
140
142
144
146
148
150
152
154
156
158
160
162
164
166
168
170
172
174
176
178
SNDMUT-S3N
DOUTL-PXP
DINR-PXN
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
I/O
-
PWRSW-S3N
DSR-PYP
DCD-PYP
TXD-EYN
PE-P5P
O
I
O
RING-PYP
O
O
I/O
-
PDB07-P5P
GND
I/O
-
PDB06-P5P
GND
PDB04-P5P
PDB02-P5P
STROB-P5N
(DAD30-P3P)
(DAD28-P3P)
(DAD24-P3P)
(DIDSL-P3P)
(DAD20-P3P)
(DCBE0-P3N)
(DAD16-P3P)
(DCBE2-P3N)
(DSTOP-P3N)
Reserved
I/O
I/O
I
PDB01-P5P
PDB00-P5P
(DPGNT-P3N)
GND
I/O
I/O
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
-
(DAD26-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
(DAD22-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
(DAD18-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
(DTRDY-P3N)
GND
I/O
-
LAN-E3V
Reserved
-
Reserved
-
-
N.C.
-
C-22
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.30 CN2300 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN)
Table C-30 Docking port I/F connector (240-PIN) (4/4)
PIN No.
179
183
185
187
189
191
193
195
197
199
201
203
205
207
209
211
213
215
217
219
221
Signal name
BIDAP-EXP
DSSDA-S5P
N.C.
I/O
O
I/O
-
PIN No.
180
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
200
202
204
206
208
210
212
214
216
218
220
222
Signal name
BIDAN-EXN
IF-P5V
I/O
O
-
(DTPA-E3N)
(DTPB-E3N)
USBP2-S3N
(USBP3-S3P)
DOUTR-PXP
DOUTL-PXN
DINR-PXP
RXD-PYN
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
GND
-
USBP2-S3P
GND
I/O
-
(USBP3-S3N)
DOUTR-PXN
DINL-PXN
GND
I/O
-
-
-
-
-
O
RTS-EYP
DTR-EYP
BUSY-P5P
PDB05-P5P
GND
I
CTS-PYP
O
I
SELCT-P5P
ACK-P5N
O
O
I/O
-
O
GND
-
PDB03-P5P
PINIT-P5N
AUTFD-P5N
(DAD31-P3P)
(DAD29-P3P)
(DAD25-P3P)
I/O
I
SLIN-P5N
ERROR-P5N
(DPREQ-P3N)
GND
I
O
O
-
I
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
(DAD27-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
(DCBE23-
P3N)
223
225
(DAD23-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
224
226
(DAD21-P3P)
I/O
I/O
(DCPCLR-
P3P)
227
229
(DAD19-P3P)
GND
I/O
-
228
230
(DAD17-P3P)
I/O
I/O
(DFRAME-
P3N)
231
(DIRDY-P3N)
I/O
232
(DDEVSL-
P3N)
I/O
233
235
237
239
GND
-
O
-
234
236
238
240
ACT-E3N
O
O
-
LINK-E3N
Reserved
BIDBP-EXP
DOCDT2-S3N
Reserved
I
BIDBN-EXN
I
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.31 CN9600 System board I/F connector (50-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
HDD FPC FNCHD*
C.31 CN9600 System board I/F connector (50-PIN)
Table C-31 System board I/F connector (50-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
GND
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
1
-
2
IDRSTA-P5N
GND
I/O
-
3
PDD07-P3P
PDD08-P3P
PDD09-P3P
PDD05-P3P
PDD04-P3P
PDD11-P3P
PDD12-P3P
PDD02-P3P
PDD01-P3P
PDD14-P3P
PDD15-P3P
PDDREQ-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
4
5
6
PDD06-P3P
GND
I/O
-
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
PDD10-P3P
GND
I/O
-
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
PDD03-P3P
GND
I/O
-
PDD13-P3P
GND
I/O
-
PDD00-P3P
GND
I/O
-
PDIOW-P3N
PDIOR-P3N
PIORDY-P3P
PDDACK-P3N
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
GND
-
GND
-
IRQ14-P3P
PDA1-P3P
PDA2-P3P
PDCS1-P3N
P5V
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
PDA0-P3P
GND
I/O
-
PDCS3-P3N
P5V
I/O
-
P5V
-
P5V
-
P5V
-
DASP-P5N
P3V
I/O
-
P3V
-
P3V
-
P3V
-
C-24
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C.32 CN9610 HDD I/F connector (44-PIN)
C.32 CN9610 HDD I/F connector (44-PIN)
Table C-32 HDD I/F connector (44-PIN)
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
PIN No.
Signal name
I/O
1
IDRSTA-P5N
PDD07-P3P
PDD06-P3P
PDD05-P3P
PDD04-P3P
PDD03-P3P
PDD02-P3P
PDD01-P3P
PDD00-P3P
GND
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
2
GND
-
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
3
4
PDD08-P3P
PDD09-P3P
PDD10-P3P
PDD11-P3P
PDD12-P3P
PDD13-P3P
PDD14-P3P
PDD15-P3P
Reserved
GND
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
PDDREQ-P3P
PDIOW-P3N
PDIOR-P3N
PDIORDY-P3P
PDDACK-P3N
IRQ14-P3P
PDA1-P3P
PDA0-P3P
PDCS1-P3N
DASP-P5N
P5V
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
-
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
GND
-
(IOCS16#)
(PDIAG#)
PDA2-P3P
PDCS3-P3N
GND
I/O
I/O
-
-
-
P5V
GND
-
N.C.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
C-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.32 CN9610 HDD I/F connector (44-PIN)
Appendix C Pin Assignment
C-26
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix. D
Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Appendix D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (1/4)
Cap
No.
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
Keytop
Note
Make
Break
Make
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
‘ ~
1 !
29
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
A9
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
0E
16
1E
26
25
2E
36
3D
3E
46
45
4E
55
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
0E
16
1E
26
25
2E
36
3D
3E
46
45
4E
55
2 @
3 #
4 $
5 %
6 ^
7 &
8 *
*2
*2
*2
*2
9 (
0 )
- _
= +
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
BkSp
Tab
Q
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
66
0D
15
1D
24
2D
2C
35
3C
43
44
4D
54
5B
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
66
0D
15
1D
24
2D
2C
35
3C
43
44
4D
54
5B
W
E
R
T
Y
U
*2
*2
*2
*2
I
O
P
[ {
] }
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (2/4)
Cap
No.
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
Keytop
Note
Make
Break
Make
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
\ |
2B
3A
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
AB
BA
9E
9F
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
5D
58
1C
1B
23
2B
34
33
3B
42
4B
4C
52
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
5D
58
1C
1B
23
2B
34
33
3B
42
4B
4C
52
*5
Caps Lock
A
S
D
F
G
H
J
*2
*2
*2
*2
K
L
; :
‘ “
43
44
45
Enter
1C
2A
56
9C
AA
D6
5A
12
61
F0
F0
F0
5A
12
61
*3
Shift (L)
No.102
key
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Z
X
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
AC
AD
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
1A
22
21
2A
32
31
3A
41
49
4A
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
1A
22
21
2A
32
31
3A
41
49
4A
C
V
B
N
M
*2
*2
*2
*2
, <
. >
/ ?
57
Shift (R)
36
B6
59
F0
59
D-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (3/4)
Cap
No.
Code set 1
Code set 2
Break
Keytop
Note
Make
Break
Make
58
Ctrl
1D
9D
14
F0
14
*3
60
61
62
Alt (L)
Space
38
39
B8
B9
11
29
F0
F0
11
29
11
*3
ALT (R)
E0 38
E0 B8 E0 11
E0
F0
75
76
Ins
E0 52
E0 53
E0 D2 E0 70
E0 D3 E0 71
E0
E0
F0
F0
70
71
*1
*1
Del
79
80
81
E0 4B E0 CB E0 6B E0
F0
F0
F0
6B
6C
69
*1
*1
*1
←
Home
End
E0 47
E0 4F
E0 C7 E0 6C E0
E0 CF E0 69
E0
83
84
85
86
E0 48
E0 50
E0 49
E0 51
E0 C8 E0 75
E0 D0 E0 72
E0
E0
F0
F0
F0
F0
75
72
7D
7A
*1
*1
*1
*1
↑
↓
PgUp
PgDn
E0 C9 E0 7D E0
E0 D1 E0 7A E0
89
E0 4D E0 CD E0 74
E0
F0
74
*1
→
110
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
Esc
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
01
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
81
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
76
05
06
04
0C
03
0B
83
0A
01
09
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
76
05
06
04
0C
03
0B
83
0A
01
09
*3
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-1 Scan codes (set 1 and set 2) (4/4)
Cap
No.
Code set 1
Make Break
Code set 2
Break
Keytop
Note
Make
78
122
123
124
F11
F12
57
58
*6
D7
D8
*6
F0
F0
*6
78
07
*3
*3
*6
07
*6
PrintSc
126
Pause
*7
*7
*7
*7
*7
*4
202
203
204
Fn
—
—
—
—
1F E0
2F E0
Win
App
E0
E0
5B E0 DB E0
5D E0 DD E0
F0
F0
1F
2F
Notes:
*1 Scan codes differ by mode.
*2 Scan codes differ by overlay function.
*3 Combination with the Fn key makes different codes.
*4 Fn key does not generate a code by itself.
*5 This key corresponds to key No. 42 in a 102-key model.
*6 Refer to Table D-6, No. 124 key scan code.
*7 Refer to Table D-7, No. 126 key scan code.
D-4
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-2 Scan codes with left Shift key
Cap
No.
Key
top
Code set 1
Code set 2
Make
Break
Make
Break
55
75
76
79
80
81
83
84
85
86
89
203
204
/
E0 AA E0 35 E0 B5 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 4A E0 F0 4A E0 12
E0 AA E0 52 E0 D2 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 12
E0 AA E0 53 E0 D3 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 12
E0 AA E0 4B E0 CB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 12
INS
DEL
←
Home E0 AA E0 47 E0 C7 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 12
End
↑
E0 AA E0 4F E0 CF E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 12
E0 AA E0 48 E0 C8 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 12
E0 AA E0 50 E0 D0 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 12
↓
PgUp E0 AA E0 49 E0 C9 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 12
PgDn E0 AA E0 51 E0 D1 E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 12
E0 AA E0 4D E0 CD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 12
E0 AA E0 5B E0 DB E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 12
E0 AA E0 5D E0 DD E0 2A E0 F0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 12
→
Win
App
Note : The table above shows scan codes with the left Shift key. In combination with the
right Shift key, scan codes are changed as listed below:
With left Shift
With right Shift
Set 1
Set 2
E0 AA __________ E0 B6
E0 2A ___________ E0 36
E0 F0 12 ________ E0 F0 59
E0 12 ___________ E0 59
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-3 Scan codes in Numlock mode
Cap
No.
Key
top
Code set 1
Code set 2
Make
Break
Make
Break
75
76
INS
DEL
←
E0 2A E0 52 E0 D2 E0 AA E0 12 E0 70 E0 F0 70 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 53 E0 D3 E0 AA E0 12 E0 71 E0 F0 71 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 4B E0 CB E0 AA E0 12 E0 6B E0 F0 6B E0 F0 12
79
80
Home E0 2A E0 47 E0 C7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 6C E0 F0 6C E0 F0 12
81
End
↑
E0 2A E0 4F E0 CF E0 AA E0 12 E0 69 E0 F0 69 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 48 E0 C8 E0 AA E0 12 E0 75 E0 F0 75 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 50 E0 D0 E0 AA E0 12 E0 72 E0 F0 72 E0 F0 12
83
84
↓
85
PgUp E0 2A E0 49 E0 C9 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7D E0 F0 7D E0 F0 12
PgDn E0 2A E0 51 E0 D1 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7A E0 F0 7A E0 F0 12
86
89
E0 2A E0 4D E0 CD E0 AA E0 12 E0 74 E0 F0 74 E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 5B E0 DB E0 AA E0 12 E0 1F E0 F0 1F E0 F0 12
E0 2A E0 5D E0 DD E0 AA E0 12 E0 2F E0 F0 2F E0 F0 12
→
203
204
Win
App
Table D-4 Scan codes with Fn key
Cap
No.
Code set 1
Make Break
Code set 2
Break
Keytop
Make
5A
43
58
ENT
CTRL
E0
E0
E0
1C
1D
38
E0
E0
E0
9C
9D
B8
E0
E0
E0
E0
E0
E0
F0
F0
F0
5A
14
11
14
11
60
LALT
121
122
123
ARROW
NUMERIC
Scrl
45
45
46
C5
77
77
7E
F0
F0
F0
77
77
7E
C5
C5
D-6
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-5 Scan codes in overlay mode
Cap
No.
Code set 1
Break
Code set 2
Break
Keytop
(7)
Make
47
Make
6C
75
08
09
10
11
23
24
25
26
37
38
39
40
52
54
55
7
8
9
0
U
I
C7
C8
C9
B7
CB
CC
CD
CA
CF
D0
D1
CE
D2
D3
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
F0
6C
75
7D
7C
6B
73
74
7B
69
72
7A
79
70
71
(8)
(9)
(*)
48
49
7D
7C
6B
73
37
(4)
(5)
(6)
(–)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(+)
(0)
(.)
4B
4C
4D
4A
4F
50
O
P
J
K
L
;
74
7B
69
72
51
7A
79
4E
52
M
.
70
53
71
/
(/)
E0
35
E0
B5
40
4A
E0
F0
4A
Table D-6 No.124 key scan code
Code set 1
Code set 2
Key
top
Shift
Make
Break
Make
Break
Prt Sc Common E0 2A E0 37 E0 B7 E0 AA E0 12 E0 7C E0 F0 7C E0 F0 12
E0 37
E0 37
54
E0 B7
E0 B7
D4
E0 7C
E0 7C
84
E0 F0 7C
E0 F0 7C
F0 B4
Ctrl +
Shift +
Alt +
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix. D Keyboard Scan/Character Codes
Table D-7 No.126 key scan code
Key
top
Code set 1
Make
Code set 2
Make
Shift
Pause Common* E1 1D 45 E1 9D C5 E1 14 77 E1 F0 14
Ctrl* E0 46 E0 C6 E0 7E E0 F0 7E
F0 77
*: This key generates only make codes.
D-8
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
Appendix E Key Layout
Figure E-1 key layout (US)
Figure E-2 key layout (UK)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E Key Layout
E-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams
F.1 LAN Loopback Connector
Figure F-1 LAN loopback Connector
F.2 RS-232C Cable (9-pin to 9-pin)
Figure F-2 RS232C cable (9-pin to 9-pin)
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F.3 RS-232C Cable (9-pin to 25-pin)
Appendix F Wiring Diagrams
F.3 RS-232C Cable (9-pin to 25-pin)
Figure F-3 RS232C cable (9-pin to 25-pin)
F-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the system BIOS program when you update the
system BIOS.
Tools
To rewrite the BIOS, you need the following tool:
‰ BIOS rewriting disk for the computer that has renewed BIOS data.
Rewriting the BIOS
Note: 1. Connect the AC adaptor to the computer when you rewrite the BIOS.
2. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the BIOS.
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
3. If you fail to rewrite BIOS, then when you next turn on the power, a message
may be displayed that the contents of the BIOS have been damaged. In this
case, insert the BIOS rewriting disk and the BIOS will be rewritten.
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC card.
4. Connect a USB FDD and insert the BIOS rewriting disk into either the USB FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the
The BIOS rewriting starts.
key (US) or
key (UK).
6. When the process is completed, eject the BIOS rewriting disk and the system is reset.
The
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G BIOS Rewrite Procedures
G-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix H
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures
This Appendix explains how to rewrite the EC/KBC system program when you update the
EC/KBC system.
Tools
To rewrite the EC/KBC, you need the following tool:
‰ EC/KBC rewriting disk for the computer
Rewriting the EC/KBC
NOTE: 1. Rewrite the EC/KBS only when instructed by a diagnostic disk release
notice.
2. Be sure to connect both battery and AC adapter to the computer when you
rewrite the EC/KBC.
3. Do not turn off the power while you are rewriting the EC/KBC.
If the rewrite fails, it might be impossible to start up the computer.
4. If you fail to rewrite EC/KBC, then when you next turn on the power, a
message may be displayed that the content of the EC/KBC has been erased.
In this case, insert the EC/KBC rewriting disk, and the EC/KBC will be
rewritten.
5. The time of rewriting EC/KBC depends on the conditions of the computer or
ICs. The computer is not hung up. Allow sufficient time. Never reboot or
turn off the power to the computer before the rewriting is completed.
1. Set the system to boot mode.
2. Turn off the power to the computer.
3. Remove the external cable and PC Card.
4. Connect a USB FDD and insert the EC/KBC rewriting disk into the USB FDD.
5. Turn on the power while holding down the Tab key. The EC/KBC rewriting starts.
6. When the EC/KBC rewrite is completed, the system is automatically turned off.
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
H-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix H EC/KBC Rewrite Procedures
H-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix I
Appendix I Reliability
The following table shows MTBF (Mean Time between Failures).
Table I-1 MTBF
MTBF
Time (hours)
5,228
System
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
I-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix I Reliability
I-2
PORTEGE M300 Maintenance Manual (960-504)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|